Owner's Manual Contents for Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine®
THE BMW 2 SERIES COUPE. OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15
2 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride. BMW AG
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app. Additional information on the Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 © 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/15, 03 15 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Addendum
ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL We wanted to provide you with some updates we recommend that you make sure that any and clarifications with respect to the printed such parts and/or accessories are appropri- BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and ate for use on your vehicle. clarifications will supersede the materials con- 4. At page 7, under the warranty section's dis- tained in that document. cussion of homologation, where it states 1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser- that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for vice center,” “your service center,” “service your vehicle there,” the text should read specialist,” or “service” are used in the that you “may not be able to lodge warranty Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that claims for your vehicle there.” the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service 5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accesso- center or another service center or repair ries” section, in the sixth sentence, the shop that employs trained personnel that word “cannot” should read “does not.” can perform maintenance and repair work 6. At page 53, in the “Check and replace on your vehicle in accordance with BMW safety belts” section, the text beginning, specifications. “This should only be done by your service 2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con- center …” should be disregarded and the tains an affirmative instruction to contact a following text should be read in lieu thereof: “service center” or “your service center,” “BMW recommends having this work per- we wanted to clarify that BMW recom- formed by a service center as it is important mends that, if you are faced with one of the that this safety feature functions properly.” situations addressed by that text, you con- 7. At page 153 under the heading: “Objects tact or seek the assistance of a BMW within the range of movement of the ped- dealer's service center or another service als” and at page 211 under the heading: center or repair shop that employs trained “Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph personnel that can perform maintenance that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should and repair work on your vehicle in accor- be disregarded and the following language dance with BMW specifications. should be read in lieu thereof: “The manu- While BMW of North America LLC, at no facturer of your vehicle recommends that cost to you, will pay for repairs required by you use floor mats that have been identified the limited warranties provided with respect by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle to your vehicle and for maintenance under and that can be properly fixed in place.” the Maintenance Program during the appli- 8. At page 159, under the heading: “Have cable warranty and maintenance coverage maintenance carried out,” the sentence periods, you are free to elect, both during beginning, “The maintenance should be those periods and thereafter, to have main- carried out …” should be disregarded and tenance and repair work provided by other the following text should be read in lieu service centers or repair shops. thereof: “BMW recommends that you have 3. Where the Owner's Manual makes refer- the maintenance carried out by your service ence to parts and accessories having been center.” approved by BMW, those references are 9. At page 172, under the heading “Tire infla- intended to reflect that those parts and tion specifications,” the sentence begin- accessories are recommended by BMW of ning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Addendum
apply to approved tire sizes …” should be 14. At page 189, under the heading: “Engine oil disregarded. change,” the text should be disregarded 10. At page 178, under the heading: “Mount- and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: ing,” the paragraph beginning, “Have BMW recommends that you have the oil mounting and balancing …” should be dis- changed at your BMW dealer's service cen- regarded and the following text should be ter or at another service center that has read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends trained personnel that can perform the work that you have mounting and balancing per- in accordance with BMW specifications. formed by your service center or a tire 15. At page 191, under the heading: “Service mounting specialist.” and Warranty Information Booklet for US 11. At page 179, under the heading: “Approved models and Warranty and Service Guide wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” Booklet for Canadian models,” the second should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, paragraph should be disregarded and the the term “Recommended” should be read following text read in lieu thereof: in its place. In addition, the text of that sec- The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- tion should be disregarded and the follow- mends that you have maintenance and ing text should be read in lieu thereof: repair performed by your BMW dealer's ser- The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly vice center or another service center or suggests that you use wheels and tires that repair shop that employs trained personnel have been recommended by the vehicle that can perform maintenance and repair manufacturer for your vehicle type; other- work on your vehicle in accordance with wise, for example, despite having the same BMW specifications. The manufacturer of official size ratings, variations can lead to your vehicle recommends that you maintain body contact and with it, the risk of severe records of all maintenance and repair work accidents. performed on your vehicle. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not 16. At page 194 and page 196, where it reads: evaluate non-recommended wheels and “Do not perform work/bulb replacement on tires to determine if they are suitable for use xenon headlights,” that text should be dis- on your vehicle. regarded and in lieu thereof the following 12. At page 183, under the heading: “Snow text should be read: “Xenon headlight work Chains,” the text should be disregarded and or replacement can cause serious and fatal the following text should be read in lieu injuries.” In the text that follows, where it thereof: reads: “[h]ave any work on the xenon light- ing system … ,” the following words should Only certain types of fine-link snow chains be read as preceding that passage: “It is have been tested by the manufacturer of strongly suggested that you …” your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe 17. At page 200, under the “Battery replace- and are recommended by the manufacturer ment” section, the text should be disre- of your vehicle. garded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center. Use of recommended vehicle batteries 13. At page 186, under the heading “Hood,” the The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar” mends that you use vehicle batteries that it should be disregarded. has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Addendum damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available. After a battery replacement, the manufac- turer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all com- fort functions are fully available, and that any “check control” messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 168 Refueling page 218. 170 Fuel 172 Wheels and tires 185 Engine compartment 6 Notes 187 Engine oil At a glance 190 Coolant 14 Cockpit 191 Maintenance 18 iDrive 193 Replacing components 27 Voice activation system 202 Breakdown assistance 30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 208 Care
Controls Reference 34 Opening and closing 214 Technical data 48 Adjusting 218 Everything from A to Z 59 Transporting children safely 63 Driving 76 Displays 90 Lights 95 Safety 112 Driving stability control systems 118 Driving comfort 130 Climate control 137 Interior equipment 145 Storage compartments
Driving tips 152 Things to remember when driving 155 Loading 158 Saving fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 6
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed Orientation precisely in order to avoid the possibility of The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ personal injury and serious damage to the ular topic is by using the index. vehicle. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of the first chapter. information. Refers to measures that can be taken to Updates made after the editorial help protect the environment. deadline "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to Any updates made after the editorial deadline select individual functions. for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice vehicle. activation system. ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the User's manual for Navigation, voice activation system. Entertainment, Communication The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Symbols on vehicle components munication and the short commands of the Indicates that you should consult the voice activation system are described in a sep‐ relevant section of this Owner's Manual for arate user's manual, which is also included information on a particular part or assembly. with the onboard literature.
Vehicle features and options Additional sources of This Owner's Manual describes all models and information all standard, country-specific and optional The service center will be happy to answer any equipment that is offered in the model series. other questions you may have. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. lected optional features or the country-specific BMW Driver’s Guide App version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ The respectively applicable country provisions tries as an app. Additional information on the must be observed when using the respective Internet: features and systems. www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐ mentary Owner's Handbooks.
6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 7
Notes
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls Therefore, have this work performed only by a are arranged differently from what is shown in BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ the illustrations. ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ ately trained personnel. If work is not carried out properly, there is a Status of the Owner's danger of subsequent damage and related Manual safety hazards.
Basic information Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐ policy of constant development that is con‐ ries approved by BMW for this purpose. ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ ucts approved by BMW and related qualified scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from advice. those in your vehicle. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. Updates made after the editorial deadline BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility Any updates made after the editorial deadline whatsoever for parts and accessories that have for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ not been specifically approved by BMW. pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a For your own safety safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply when country-specific government approval Warranty has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐ Your vehicle is technically configured for the ating conditions to which components might operating conditions and registration require‐ be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products ments applying in the country of first delivery - could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated own stringent quality standards. in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ California Proposition 65 Warning ating conditions and permit requirements. If California laws require us to state the following your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐ warning: gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ there. Further information can be obtained bile components and parts, including compo‐ from your Service Centre. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Maintenance and repairs State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain materials and high-performance electronics, products of component wear contain or emit requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 8
Notes
chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures: ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used for US models engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri‐ Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty. lowing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. tion about the condition of the vehicle, events ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a Detailed information about these warranties is system or the environment: listed in the Service and Warranty Information ▷ Operating mode of system components, fill Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and levels for instance. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ designed to meet the particular operating con‐ tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, ditions and homologation requirements in your transverse acceleration. country and continental region in order to de‐ ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating ing the stability control system. conditions and homologation requirements. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. You should also be aware of any applicable This data is purely technical in nature and is warranty limitations or exclusions for such used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ country or region. In such case, please contact mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over Customer Relations for further information. routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ Maintenance pair services, service processes, warranty Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ road safety, operational reliability and the New mation can be read out from the event and Vehicle Limited Warranty. fault memories by the service personnel, in‐
8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 9
Notes
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, nostic tools. You can obtain further information gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. there if you need it. After an error is corrected, However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ the information in the fault memory is deleted ment, could combine the EDR data with the or overwritten on a continuous basis. type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ With the vehicle in use there are situations quired during a crash investigation. where you can associate these technical data To read data recorded by an EDR, special with individuals if combined with other infor‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law the assistance of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment, Additional functions that are contractually can read the information if they have access to agreed with the customer - such as vehicle the vehicle or the EDR. emergency locating - you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle. Vehicle identification number Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or The vehicle identification number can be found less. in the engine compartment. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: The vehicle identification number can also be ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were found behind the windshield. operating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. Reporting safety defects ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing For US customers the accelerator and/or brake pedal. The following only applies to vehicles owned ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. and operated in the US. These data can help provide a better under‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect standing of the circumstances in which which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ crashes and injuries occur. jury or death, you should immediately inform EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of recorded by the EDR under normal driving North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 10
Notes
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 11
Notes
11 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
All around the steering wheel
1 Power windows 45 Front fog lights 93 2 Exterior mirror operation 55 3 Glove compartment on the driver's Parking lights 90 side 146 Driver assistance systems Low beams 90 Intelligent Safety 103
Lane departure warning 109
4 Lights
14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
Automatic headlight con‐ 8 Steering wheel buttons, right trol 91 Entertainment source Daytime running lights 91 Adaptive Light Control 91 Volume High-beam Assistant 92 Instrument lighting 93 Voice activation 27
5 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see user's manual for Turn signal 67 Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Thumbwheel for selection lists 84 High beams, head‐ light flasher 67 9 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 64 High-beam Assistant 92 Auto Start/Stop function 65 Roadside parking lights 91 10 Steering column stalk, right On-board computer 85 Wiper 68
6 Steering wheel buttons, left Rain sensor 69 Store speed 118 Clean the windshields and head‐ lights 70 Resume speed 118 11 Horn, total area Cruise control on/off, inter‐ 12 Steering wheel heating 58 rupt 118 13 Adjust steering wheel 57 Cruise control rocker switch 118 14 Unlock hood 186 7 Instrument cluster 76
15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Control Display 18 8 Parking brake 67 2 Glove compartment 145 9 PDC Park Distance Control 120 3 Ventilation 135 Rearview camera 123 4 Hazard warning system 202 Parking assistant 125 10 Driving Dynamics Control 114 Central locking system 39 Dynamic Stability Control 112 5 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ 11 Steptronic transmission selector nication lever 71 6 Climate control 130 Manual transmission selector lever 71 7 Controller with buttons 18
16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
All about the roofliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lights 93 quest 202
2 Glass sunroof 46 5 Interior lights 93
3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ senger airbag 97
17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Control Display This chapter describes all standard, country- Hints specific and optional features offered with the ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the series. It also describes features that are not care instructions. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control also applies to safety-related functions and Display; otherwise, the Control Display can systems. The respectively applicable country be damaged. provisions must be observed when using the ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on respective features and systems. the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐ lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐ duced down to complete deactivation. The concept Once the temperature is reduced, e.g. through shadow or climate control system, The iDrive combines the functions of many the normal functions are re-established. switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ ated from a central location. Switching on Using the iDrive during a trip 1. Switch on the ignition. To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ 2. Press the controller. ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other traffic, never attempt Switch off to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow it.◀ 1. Press button. 2. "Turn off control display" Control elements at a glance
Control elements
Controller with navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select 1 Control Display menu items and enter the settings. 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on Some iDrive functions can be operated using the equipment version, with touchpad the touchpad on the controller.
18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
1. Turn. Press button Function
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. 1. Turn. 2. Press.
2. Press. 3. Move in four directions.
3. Move in two directions. Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
Buttons on controller Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected. Press button Function 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu MENU Open the main menu. item is highlighted. Audio Open audio menu last listened to, switch between audio me‐ nus.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
2. Press the controller. Operating concept Menu items in the Owner's Manual Opening the main menu In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be Press button. selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".
Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Move the controller to the left. Closes current display and shows previous display. Reopens previous display by pressing BACK button. In this case, the current The main menu is displayed. panel is not closed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the ▷ Move the controller to the right. main menu. Opens new display on top of previous screen.
20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting cate that additional panels can be opened. is displayed.
Display of an opened menu When selecting a menu, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. 3. Press the controller. Opening the Options menu Press button. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ The "Options" menu is displayed. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. Function is activated. Function is deactivated.
Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller: Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is Selecting functions displayed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Touchpad" Options menu 3. Select the desired function. The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". ▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐ This area remains unchanged. tive map. ▷ Control options for the selected main ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses. menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered ▷ If applicable, further operating options for letters and numbers. the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Entering letters and numbers Changing settings Entering letters requires some practice at the 1. Select a field. beginning. When entering, pay attention to the following:
21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters Example: setting the clock and numbers, it may be necessary to reel via the controller to the corresponding In‐ Setting the clock put mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the On the Control Display: spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical. 1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐ ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on played. the Control Display. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ ▷ Always enter associated characters, such lighted, and then press the controller. as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐ pends on the set language. Where neces‐ sary, enter special characters via the con‐ troller. ▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad. ▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad. ▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left upper area of the touchpad. to display "Time/Date". ▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is in the lower area of the touchpad. highlighted, and then press the controller. Using interactive map and Internet Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the navigation system and Internet sites. Function Controls
Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐ Internet sites. spective direc‐ tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ map or Internet sites. the touchpad with lighted, and then press the controller. fingers.
Display the menu or open Tap once. a link in the Internet.
Changing settings You may change control display settings via touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.
22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning press the controller. Text message was received. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller. Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
Status information SIM card is missing.
Status field Enter PIN. The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Entertainment symbols ▷ Time. Symbol Meaning ▷ Current entertainment source. ▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD player. ▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection. ▷ Phone status. Gracenote® database. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. AUX-IN port.
Status field symbols USB audio interface. The symbols are grouped as follows. Mobile phone audio interface. Radio symbols Additional symbols Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning HD Radio station is being received. Spoken instructions are turned off. Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols Split screen Symbol Meaning General information Incoming or outgoing call. Additional information can be displayed on the Missed call. right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the on-board comupter. Wireless network reception In the divided screen view, the so-called split strength. screen, this information remains visible even Symbol flashes: network search. when you change to another menu. Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
Switching the split screen on and off Without navigation system and On the Control Display: telephone Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐ 1. Press button. tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication. 2. "Split screen" Saving a function Selecting the display 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. On the Control Display: 2. Press and hold the desired button, 1. Press button. until a signal sounds. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is Running a function selected. Press button. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen The function will work immediately. content". This means, e.g., that the number is dialed 5. Select the desired menu item. when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at top edge of screen.
Programmable memory buttons
General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Deleting the button assignments rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for tions, phone numbers and menu entries. approx. five seconds. Settings are stored for the profile currently in 2. "OK" use.
24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
Deleting personal in the Entering letters and numbers vehicle General information The concept On the Control Display: Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ personal data, such as stored radio stations. bers. These personal data can be permanently de‐ 2. Select additional letters or numbers if leted through iDrive. needed. General information 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing data can be deleted: Symbol Function ▷ Personal Profile settings. Press the controller: delete the let‐ ▷ Stored radio stations. ter or number. ▷ Stored Favorites buttons. Press the controller for an extended ▷ Travel and computer information. period: delete all letters or numbers. ▷ Music collection. ▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. Switching between cases, letters and numbers ▷ Phone book. Depending on the menu, you can reel between ▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. entering upper and lower case, letters and ▷ Voice notes. numbers: ▷ Login accounts. Symbol Function ▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering. Enter the letters. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers.
or Tip controller up. Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary. Without navigation system Deleting data Select the symbol. Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐ trol Display. Entry comparison Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. rowed down with every letter entered and let‐ 2. "Settings" ters may be added automatically. 3. Open "Options". Entries are continuously compared with data 4. "Delete personal data" stored in the vehicle. 5. "Continue" ▷ Only those letters are offered during input for which data is available. 6. "OK"
25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
▷ Target search: names of locations may be entered in languages available through Control Display.
26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options Using voice activation This chapter describes all standard, country- Activating the voice activation system specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not 1. Press button on the steering necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to wheel. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Wait for the signal. systems. The respectively applicable country 3. Say the command. provisions must be observed when using the A command that is recognized by the voice respective features and systems. activation system is announced and dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ The concept cates that the voice activation system is active. ▷ Most functions displayed on the Control If no other commands are available, use func‐ Display can be operated by voice com‐ tion via iDrive. mands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements Terminating the voice activation during input. system ▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐ vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the ing wheel or ›Cancel‹. voice activation system. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. Possible commands ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation Most menu items on the Control Display can system. be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ Requirements play. Via the Control Display, set a language that is There are short commands for many functions. also supported by the voice activation system You may select lists such as phone lists via so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐ fied. actly as they show in the respective list. Set the language, refer to page 88. Having possible commands read aloud You can have available commands read out loud for you: ›Voice commands‹ E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.
27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
Executing functions using short commands 2. Press button on the steering wheel. Execute functions on the main menu via short commands. It almost doesn't matter which 3. ›Tone‹ menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. List of short commands for the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Setting the voice dialog munication Owner's Manual. Set system to standard dialog or use a short version. Help dialog for the voice activation The short version of the voice dialog plays system back short messages in abbreviated form. Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ 1. "Settings" Additional commands for the help dialog: 2. "Language/Units" ▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ tion about the current operating options 3. "Speech type:" and the most important commands for 4. Select setting. them. ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.
One example: open the tone settings
Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller. Adjusting the volume 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ needed. struction until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the 2. Press button on the steering volume of other audio sources is changed. wheel. ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐ 3. ›Radio‹ rently in use. 4. ›Tone‹
Via short command Hints on Emergency The desired tone settings can also be started Requests via a short command. Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ needed. tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 29
Voice activation system At a glance
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 202, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
29 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 30
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options Select components
This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Press button. specific and optional features offered with the 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info". series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Press the controller. the selected options or country versions. This 4. Selecting desired range: also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ "Quick reference" systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the ▷ "Search by pictures" respective features and systems. ▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. It specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle.
Components of the Integrated Leafing through the Owner's Manual Owner's Manual The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Page by page with link access three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ Turn the controller until the next or previous mation or possible access. page is displayed. Quick Reference Guide Page by page without link access The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐ tion how to operate the car, how to use basic ping the links. vehicle functions or what to do in case of a breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press played while driving. the controller to browse from page to page. Scroll back. Search by images Image search provides information and de‐ scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ Scroll forward. ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual Search for information and descriptions by en‐ tering terms selected from the index.
30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 31
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons temporarily selected function You may open the relevant information di‐ General information rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Opening via the iDrive rectly. To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the Options menu: Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive. 1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" 2. Press selected button for more menu is displayed. than 2 seconds. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Executing Opening when a Check Control Press button. message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ Directly from the Check Control message on mediately. the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate permanently between the last dis‐ played function and the Owner's Manual re‐ peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.
31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 1 Unlocking 2 Locking Remote control/key 3 Unlocking the trunk lid General information 4 Panic mode The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with integrated key. Integrated key Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐ tery. You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific ver‐ sion. For Settings, refer to page 43. The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Personal Profile, refer to page 35. The remote controls hold information on re‐ quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐ mote control, refer to page 191 row 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: ▷ Driver's door. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
The front passenger glove compartment con‐ tains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 41.
34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
Replacing the battery ▷ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo‐ bile devices in the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐ trol. 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up. 5. Press the cover closed. Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding Take the used battery to a recycling Check Control message appears, hold the re‐ center or to your service center. mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while New remote controls pressing the brake. New remote controls are available from the Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check service center. Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on Loss of the remote controls the steering column and press the Start/Stop Lost remote controls can be disabled by your button within 10 seconds while pressing the service center. clutch pedal. If the remote control is not recognized: slightly Emergency detection of remote change the height position of the remote con‐ control trol and repeat the procedure. It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ Personal Profile mote control by external sources e.g., by radio masts. The concept ▷ Empty battery in remote control. Personal Profile provides three profiles, using ▷ Interference from radio transmissions which personal vehicle settings can be stored. through mobile devices in close proximity Every remote control has one of these profiles to remote control. assigned. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ Profile management tomatically applied. If several drivers use their own remote control, Opening profiles the vehicle will adjust the personal settings Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ ferent profile may be activated. stored, if the vehicle has been used in the 1. "Settings" meantime by a person with a different remote control. 2. "Profiles" Changes to the settings are automatically 3. Select a profile. saved in the personal profile. ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile Three personal profiles and a guest profile can are automatically applied. be created. ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ mote control being used at the time. Adjusting ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ The settings for the following systems and ent remote control, this profile will apply to functions are saved in the active profile. The both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐ scope of storable settings is country- and tiated anymore between the settings for equipment-dependable. the two remote controls. ▷ Unlocking and locking. Renaming profiles ▷ Lights. A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ ▷ Climate control. file to avoid confusion between the profiles. ▷ Radio. 1. "Settings" ▷ Instrument cluster. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Programmable memory buttons. 3. "Options" ▷ Volumes, tone. 4. "Rename current profile" ▷ Control Display. ▷ Navigation. Resetting profiles ▷ Park Distance Control PDC. The settings of the active profile are reset to ▷ Rearview camera their default values.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control. 1. "Settings" ▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ 2. "Profiles" tion, steering wheel position. 3. "Options" ▷ Cruise control. 4. "Reset current profile" ▷ Intelligent Safety. Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐ ported. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐
36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ Display profile list during start file function. The profile list can be displayed during each The following export options are available: start to select the desired profile. ▷ Via BMW Online. 1. "Settings" ▷ Via the USB port to a USB device. 2. "Profiles" Popular file systems for USB devices are 3. "Options" supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐ 4. "Display user list at startup" ommended formats for profile export. Other formats may not support the export. 1. "Settings" Using the remote control 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" Note 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Take the remote control with you USB interface: "USB device" People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ Importing profiles side. Always take the remote control with you Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle imported via BMW Online. can then be opened from the outside.◀ Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ ported via the USB interface. Unlocking Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ Press button on the remote control. ported profile. 1. "Settings" ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are being unlocked. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐ 3. "Import profile" vated. This function is not available, if the 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" interior lamps were switched off manually. USB interface: "USB device" ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this function was activated. Using the guest profile ▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient The guest profile is for individual settings that closing are folded open. are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. files. For Settings, refer to page 43. This can be useful for drivers who are using The alarm system, refer to page 44, is dis‐ the vehicle temporarily and do not have their armed. own profile.
1. "Settings" Convenient opening 2. "Profiles" Press and hold this button on the re‐ 3. "Guest" mote control after unlocking. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the current remote control.
37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
The windows and the glass sunroof are The trunk lid opens slightly, regardless of opened, as long as the button on the remote whether the vehicle was previously locked or control is pressed. unlocked. Depending on the features and the country Locking version, it is also possible to have door un‐ Locking from the outside locked. Create the settings, refer to page 43. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ locked again as soon as it closes. not be unlocked from inside without special Do not place the remote control in the knowledge.◀ cargo area The driver's door must be closed. Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ Press button on the remote control. mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.◀ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are being locked. Malfunction The alarm system, refer to page 44, is armed. Remote control detection by the vehicle can Switching on interior lights and among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ courtesy lights lowing circumstances: ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ Press button on the remote control with charged. Replace the battery, refer to the vehicle locked. page 35. This function is not available, if the interior ▷ Interference of the radio connection from lamps were switched off manually. transmission towers or other equipment If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ with high transmit power. onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐ ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti- metal objects. theft warning system, refer to page 45, are ▷ Interference of the radio connection from turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐ mobile phones or other electronic devices fore pressing the button again. in direct proximity. Do not transport the remote control together Panic mode with metal objects or electronic devices. You can trigger the alarm system if you find In the case of interference, the vehicle can also yourself in a dangerous situation. be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐ Press button on the remote control for out remote control, refer to page 39. at least 3 seconds. For US owners only To reel off the alarm: press any button. The transmitter and receiver units comply with Unlocking the trunk lid part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ Press button on the remote control for erned by the following: approx. 1 second. FCC ID:
38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
▷ LX8766S. ▷ LX8766E. ▷ LX8CAS. ▷ LX8CAS2. ▷ MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34. ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ The other doors must be unlocked or locked ference, and from the inside. ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may Alarm system cause undesired operation. The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is Any unauthorized modifications or changes to locked with the integrated key. these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the door lock. Without remote control In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ From the outside tion, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page 35. Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside From the inside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special Unlocking and locking knowledge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.◀
Pressing the central locking system button locks or unlocks the vehicle with the doors closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is ▷ Press button on the remote con‐ automatically unlocked. The hazard warning trol for approx. 1 second. system and interior lights come on. As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ locked. Unlocking with the remote control, Unlocking and opening refer to page 38. The trunk lid is unlocked and can be swung upward.
Opening from the inside With the vehicle is stationary, press the button in the driver's footwell.
The trunk lid is unlocked and opens slightly.
▷ Press the central locking system button to Closing unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest. Hints ▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door Keep the closing path clear handle twice: the first time unlocks the Make sure that the closing path of the door, the second time opens it. The other trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ doors remain locked. sult.◀
Do not place the remote control in the Trunk lid cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not Opening leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and mote control is locked inside the vehicle when up. the trunk lid is closed.◀ Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Closing
Opening from the outside
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid. ▷ Press button on the trunk lid.
40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
Locking separately Comfort Access supports the following func‐ The trunk lid can be locked separately with the tions: switch in the glove compartment. If the glove ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be ▷ Convenient closing. opened. ▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately. ▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. ▷ Start the engine. ▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ row 2. Functional requirements ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ ence nearby. Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control the central locking system. must be located outside of the vehicle. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ possible until after approx. 2 seconds. trol can be handed out without the key. ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ mote control is in the vehicle. Emergency unlocking Unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks. Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow. This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control. Comfort Access
The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.
41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
Locking In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors fold in.
Separately unlocking the trunk lid Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing the re‐ mote control button. The situation of the doors does not change. Do not place the remote control in the Touch the surface on the door handle of the cargo area driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐ Take the remote control with you and do not ing the door handle. leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when This corresponds with pressing the button on the trunk lid is closed.◀ the remote control. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition Malfunction and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐ Remote control detection by the vehicle can cle. among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ lowing circumstances: ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ Convenient closing charged. Replace the battery, refer to Monitor closing page 35. Monitor closing to ensure that no one ▷ Interference of the radio connection from becomes trapped.◀ transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock Touch the surface on the door handle of the the vehicle using the buttons of the remote driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with control or using the integrated key, refer to your finger and hold it there without grasping page 39. the door handle. This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button.
42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
Adjusting ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" Unlocking The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ Automatic locking fer to page 35. The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 35. Doors 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select the desired function: 3. Select the symbol. ▷ "Lock if no door is opened" 4. Select the desired function: The vehicle locks automatically after a ▷ "Driver's door only" short period of time if no door is Only the driver's door and the fuel filler opened. flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ ▷ "Lock after start driving" locks the entire vehicle. The vehicle locks automatically after ▷ "All doors" you drive off. The entire vehicle is unlocked. Retrieving the seat and mirror settings Trunk lid The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions Depending on optional features and country used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ version, this setting is not offered in some rently in use. cases. When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions 1. "Settings" are automatically retrieved if this function was activated. 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select the symbol. Pinch hazard when moving back the seat 4. Select the desired function: If this function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is ▷ "Tailgate" empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or The trunk lid unlocks. objects damaged when the seat is moved ▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" back.◀ The trunk lid and the doors are un‐ The adjustment procedure is interrupted: locked. ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. Confirmation signals from the vehicle ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ ory is pressed. The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 35. Activating the setting 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ 3. "Last seat position autom." mation signals.
43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
Alarm system To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The concept Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system responds to: ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid. ▷ Movements in the interior. ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the car. ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. The alarm system briefly signals tampering: ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ tem. The system is armed. ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed Arming and disarming the alarm properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ system cured. When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. the same time. When the still open access is closed, inte‐ rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will Door lock and armed alarm system be switched on. The alarm system is triggered when the door is ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the ing: door lock. The vehicle has not been tampered with. Trunk lid and armed alarm system ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but The trunk lid can be opened even when the no longer than approx. 5 minutes: alarm system is armed. An alarm has been triggered. After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again when the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. Panic mode The alarm system responds in situations such You can trigger the alarm system if you find as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is yourself in a dangerous situation. towed. Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.
44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
Interior motion sensor Power windows The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. Hint Take the remote control with you Avoiding unintentional alarms Take the remote control with you when The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in not operate the power windows and injure the following situations: themselves.◀ ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ cles, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. Opening The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ ▷ Press the button to the resistance onds and then continues to flash. point. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ The window opens while the switch is held. sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked again. ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. Switching off the alarm The window opens automatically. Pressing ▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or the switch again stopse the motion. switch on the ignition, if needed through See also: Convenient opening, refer to emergency detection of remote control, re‐ page 37, via remote control. fer to page 35. ▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying Closing the remote control on your person, grasp Keep the closing path clear the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely. Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.
45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
Glass sunroof, powered ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. General information The window closes automatically. Pulling The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ again stops the motion. tion is switched on. See also: closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to page 41. Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the Pinch protection system closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ erwise, injuries may result.◀ Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ tection Take the remote control with you Even with the pinch protection system, check Take the remote control with you when that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐ situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ selves.◀
No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the win‐ dow's range of movement; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a window closes, closing is interrupted. The window reopens slightly.
Closing without the pinch protection system Tilting the glass sunroof Keep the closing path clear Push switch briefly upward. Monitor closing and make sure that the ▷ The closed glass sunroof is closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, tilted. injuries may result.◀ ▷ The opened glass sunroof E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐ closes until it is in its tilted vent window from closing properly - proceed position. The sliding visor as follows: does not move.
1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and hold it there. Opening/closing the glass sunroof and The pinch protection is limited and the sliding visor together window reopens slightly if the closing force ▷ Press the reel in the desired exceeds a certain margin. direction to the resistance 2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again point and hold it there. within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ The window closes without jam protection. sor open together as long as the reel is held down.
46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
The glass sunroof closes as Closing without the pinch protection long as the reel is held system down. The sliding visor can E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as be manually closed. follows: ▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past 1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐ the resistance point. ance point and hold. The glass sunroof and sliding visor open The pinch protection is limited and the automatically. glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing The glass sunroof closes automatically. force exceeds a certain margin. The sliding visor can be manually closed. 2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐ Pressing the reel upward stops the motion. sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐ roof closes without jam protection. Make Additional options: sure that the closing area is clear. ▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via the remote control. Initializing after a power failure ▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer After a power failure during the opening or to page 41. closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. Comfort position If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐ Initializing the system pletely opened, the comfort position has been The system can be initialized when the vehicle attained. In this position the wind noises in the is stationary and the engine is running. interior are the least. During the initialization, the glass sunroof If desired, continue the movement by pressing closes without jam protection. the reel. Keep the closing path clear Pinch protection system Monitor closing and make sure that the If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ erwise, injuries may result.◀ ment is stopped, beginning at approximately Press the reel up and hold it until the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the initialization is complete: the tilted position during closing. ▷ Initialization begins within The glass sunroof reopens slightly. 15 seconds and is com‐ Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ pleted when the glass sun‐ tection roof is completely closed. Despite the pinch protection system, check ▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐ that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear; tection. otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐ rupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.◀
47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 48
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep This chapter describes all standard, country- the seat's area of movement unobstructed; specific and optional features offered with the otherwise, people might get injured or objects series. It also describes features that are not damaged.◀ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Manually adjustable seats systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the At a glance respective features and systems.
Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 52. 1 Forward/backward ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 53. 2 Thigh support ▷ Airbags, refer to page 95. 3 Seat tilt 4 Backrest width Seats 5 Lumbar support 6 Height Hints 7 Backrest tilt Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected Forward/backward movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally pro‐ vided by the belt.◀ Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.
48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat ward or back slightly making sure it engages engages properly. properly. Electrically adjustable seats Height At a glance
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary. 1 Seat and mirror memory 2 Backrest width Backrest tilt 3 Lumbar support 4 Backrest tilt 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
General information The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐ cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐ sition is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer to page 43, is activated for this purpose. Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary. Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back. Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
2. Height. Thigh support
3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.
Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐ gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch. 4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down.
Backrest width Change the width of the back‐ rest using the side wings to ad‐ just the lateral support.
50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
Front seat heating Manual length adjustment
Comfort entry The comfort entry contains a memory function for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ ment. 1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Switching on Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the journey is continued within approx. 15 2. Fold backrest forward. minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ 3. Push the seat forward. ically with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 159, is acti‐ Original position vated, the heater output is reduced. 1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐ tion. Switch off 2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. Press button longer. Electric forward/backward adjustment The LEDs go out. Comfort entry Entering the rear The comfort entry contains a memory function for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ Note ment. Folding back and locking the backrest 1. Pull lever up to the stop. Before driving off, fold back and lock the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.◀
Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀
2. Fold backrest forward. 3. To change the entry area:
51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
▷ Press and hold this button until Hints the seat has moved to the de‐ One person per safety belt sired position. Releasing the button stops window/roof movement. Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or ▷ Press button briefly. The seat au‐ small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ tomatically moves to the end po‐ sition. Pressing again stops the motion. Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly Original position across the lap and shoulders, as close to the 1. Moving the seat to its original position: body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies ▷ Press and hold this button until low around the hips in the lap area and does the seat has moved to its original not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt position. Releasing the button stops can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐ window/roof movement. jure the abdomen. ▷ Press button briefly. The seat The safety belt must not lie across the neck, moves to its original position. rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable Pressing again stops the motion. objects, or be pinched.◀
2. Folding the backrest back. What reduces the restraining effect Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull Safety belts the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the Seats with safety belt restraining effect is reduced.◀ The vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt. Buckling the belt General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. For the occupants' safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point the belt buckle. will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐ nism.
52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
Safety belt reminder for driver's and Adjusting the height passenger's seat The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ nal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Damage to safety belts ▷ To raise: push. Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push aged otherwise: headrest down. Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors Removing checked. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Check and replace safety belts sitting in the seat in question. This should only be done by your service center; otherwise, this safety feature might not work properly.◀
Front headrests
Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event 1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ of an accident. sistance. Adjusting the head restraint 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐ straint out completely. Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased Before transporting passengers risk of injury in an accident.◀ Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ Height tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀ Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.
Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.
53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased ▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1, risk of injury in an accident.◀ and press down the head restraint, arrow 2. ▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints. Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is Removing approximately at ear level. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. Adjusting the height
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ ▷ To raise: push. sistance. ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐ headrest down. straint out completely. Before transporting passengers Folding down head restraints Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ Extending/retracting head restraint porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted able.◀ headrests again if passengers are being car‐ ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀
54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
Seat and mirror memory Calling up settings
Hints Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. Do not retrieve the memory while driving 2. Switch off the ignition. Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. seat could result in an accident.◀ The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. Keep the movement area unobstructed The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting When changing the seat position, keep the seat or one of the buttons is pressed. the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects Safety mode damaged.◀ 1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐ tion. The concept 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions until the adjustment procedure is com‐ can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and pleted. called up. Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory. Calling up of a seat position deactivated At a glance After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐ tions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: ▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid. ▷ Press a button on the remote control. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Storing Exterior mirrors 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position. General information The mirror on the passenger side is more 3. Press button. The LED in the but‐ curved than the driver's side mirror. ton lights up. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ 4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED ror setting is stored for the profile currently in is lit. The LED goes out. use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ If the SET button is pressed accidentally: mote control, the position is automatically re‐ trieved if this function is active. Press button again. The LED goes out.
55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
Note Automatic Curb Monitor Estimating distances correctly The concept Objects reflected in the mirror are closer If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on than they appear. Do not estimate the distance the front passenger side is tilted downward. to the traffic behind you based on what you This improves your view of the curb and other see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g. of an accident.◀ Activating At a glance 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. 2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position.
Fold in and out 1 Adjusting 56 Press button. 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out 56 Possible at speeds up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. Selecting a mirror E. g. this is advantageous To change over to the other mirror: ▷ In car washes. Slide the switch. ▷ In narrow streets. ▷ For folding mirrors back out that were Adjusting electrically folded away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ The setting corresponds to the direc‐ matically at a speed of approx. tion in which the button is pressed. 25 mph/40 km/h. Fold in the mirror in a car wash Saving positions Before washing the car in an automatic Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 55. car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could Adjusting manually be damaged, depending on the width of the In case of electrical malfunction press edges of vehicle.◀ mirror. Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.
56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
Automatic dimming feature Interior rearview mirror, automatic Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ dimming feature med. Photocells are used to control the Interior rearview mirror, refer to page 57. The concept
Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
Photocells are used for control: ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the back of the mirror.
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior Functional requirement rear view mirror, flip the lever forward. For proper operation: ▷ Keep the photocells clean. Turn knob ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Note Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by could result in an accident.◀ the interior mirror.
57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 59
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
The right place for children Note Note Children in the vehicle Deactivating the front-seat passenger Do not leave children unattended in the airbags vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ If a child restraint system is used in the front selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ doors.◀ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ Children should always be in the rear bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Transporting children in the rear Installing child restraint Only transport children younger than systems 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in Hints accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk Manufacturer's information for child re‐ of injury in an accident. straint systems Children 13 years of age or older must wear a To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐ safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint tems, observe the information provided by the system can no longer be used due to their age, system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐ weight and size.◀ tive effect can be lost.◀ Ensuring the stability of the child seat Children on the front passenger seat When installing child restraint systems, Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ straint system in the front passenger seat, tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and make sure that the front, knee and side airbags headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ on the front passenger side are deactivated. justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise ger airbags, refer to page 97. the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because
59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 60
Controls Transporting children safely
of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stabil‐ rest.◀ ity of the child seat will be reduced.◀ Adjustable backrest width: before installing a On the front passenger seat child restraint system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do Deactivating airbags not change the backrest width again and do Deactivating the front-seat passenger not call up a memory position. airbags Child seat security If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. The rear safety belts and the front passenger Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ automatically, refer to page 97. ten child restraint systems. Seat position and height The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐ nently locked to fasten child restraint systems. Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ ble and adjust its height to the highest and Locking the safety belt thus best possible position for the belt and to 1. Pull out the strap completely. offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐ 2. Secure the child restraint system with the dent. belt. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, tight against the child restraint system. move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐ The safety belt is locked. til the best possible belt guide position is reached. Unlocking the safety belt Backrest width 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. Backrest width for the child seat 2. Remove the child restraint system. Before installing a child restraint system 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely. in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change
60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 61
Transporting children safely Controls
LATCH child restraint system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ Before installing LATCH child dren. restraint systems Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐ Note straint system. Follow manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint systems Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint systems, observe the operating and safety in‐ 1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐ the user's manual of the system. erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ duced.◀ erly connected.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child Mounting points and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses. The respective symbol shows the an‐ chor for the upper retaining strap. Note Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked with this symbol. It can be found on Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐ the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf. chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint Note system is resting snugly against the backrest; Mounting eyelets otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐ Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐ duced.◀ per retaining strap to secure child restraint systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could Position be damaged.◀ The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Retaining strap guide Seats equipped with lower anchors are Retaining strap marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐ bols. It is not recommended to use the Make sure the upper retaining strap does inner lower anchors of standard outer not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle strap will not properly secure the child restraint seat belt instead for the middle seat. system in the event of an accident.◀
61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 62
Controls Transporting children safely
1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eye 5 Rear window shelf 6 Seat backrest 7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Remove the mounting point cover. 2. Raise the head restraint. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 63
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle features and options Ignition off Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop This chapter describes all standard, country- button again without stepping on the brake. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal. the selected options or country versions. This All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go also applies to safety-related functions and out. systems. The respectively applicable country To save battery power when the engine is off, provisions must be observed when using the switch off the ignition and any unnecessary respective features and systems. electronic systems/power consumers. P when the ignition is switched off Start/Stop button P is engaged automatically when the ig‐ nition is switched off. When in an automatic car The concept wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀ Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off The ignition automatically cuts off while the and starts the engine. vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: Steptronic transmission: The ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the engine starts if the brakes are low beams are activated. stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged ton. completely, so that the engine can still be Manual transmission: The engine starts with started. This function is only available the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop when the low beams are turned off. button is pressed. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and Ignition on the low beams are turned off. Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled button without stepping on the brake. with driver's door open and low beams off. Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ The low beams switch to parking lights after ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. approx. 15 minutes of no use. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Radio ready state Most of the indicator and warning lights in the Activate radio-ready state: instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time. ▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary Some electronic systems/power consumers electronic systems/power consumers. remain ready for operation.
63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 64
Controls Driving
The radio-ready state switches off automati‐ Repeated starting in quick succession cally: Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐ ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, tral locking system. posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.◀ ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while started. the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., moderate engine speeds. the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons: Steptronic transmission ▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. Starting the engine ▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. 1. Depress the brake pedal. ▷ When automatically switching from low 2. Press the Start/Stop button. beams to parking lights. The ignition is activated automatically for a If the engine is switched off and the ignition is certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ switched on, the system automatically gine starts. switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, Manual transmission the daytime running lights are activated. Starting the engine Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐ Hints tral. Enclosed areas 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Do not let the engine run in enclosed The ignition is activated automatically for a areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ lead to loss of consciousness and death. The gine starts. exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ Engine stop Unattended vehicle Do not leave the vehicle unattended with Hints the engine running; doing so poses a risk of Take the remote control with you danger. Take the remote control with you when Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ not start the engine.◀ mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐ vent the vehicle from moving.◀ Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed. Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 65
Driving Controls
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ is available when the vehicle is traveling faster hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h. direction of the curb.◀ Engine stop Before driving into a car wash The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ ing a stop under the following conditions: serve instructions for going into an automatic Steptronic transmission: car wash, refer to page 208. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ tion D. Steptronic transmission ▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped. Switching off the engine ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the 1. Engage selector lever position P with the driver's door is closed. vehicle stopped. Manual transmission: 2. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is The engine is switched off. not pressed. The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the 3. Set the parking brake. driver's door is closed. The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced Manual transmission when the engine is switched off. Switching off the engine Displays in the instrument cluster 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button. The READY display in the tach‐ ometer signals that the Auto 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. Start/Stop function is ready to 3. Set the parking brake. start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been met. The concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic Functional limitations lights. The ignition remains switched on. The The engine is not switched off automatically in engine starts again automatically for driving the following situations: off. ▷ External temperature too low. Automatic mode ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ After every start of the engine using the Start/ matic climate control is running. Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated the last selected state, refer to page 66. or cooled to the required level. When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it
65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 66
Controls Driving
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ Functional limitations ature. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ steering wheel is being turned. lowing situations: ▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ when the cooling function is switched on. matic climate control is switched on. ▷ The steering wheel is turned. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ ▷ At higher elevations. lector lever position D to R, N or M/S. ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S. ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or matic climate control is switched on. R. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when Starting the engine the heating is switched on. The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ ▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐ lowing conditions: cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession. ▷ Steptronic transmission: By releasing the brake pedal. Activating/deactivating the system ▷ Manual transmission: manually The clutch pedal is pressed. Using the button After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. ▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied Press button. length of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/ ▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is Stop button. deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.
66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 67
Driving Controls
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is Releasing activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e. g., when leaving it. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ the lever down. matically. Hints 2. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. Use while driving On rare occasions if it is necessary to use Automatic deactivation the parking brake while driving, do not use ex‐ In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function cessive force when applying it. When using it, is deactivated automatically for safety reasons keep the button on the lever depressed. as if the driver were absent. Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐ ing the parking brake may cause the rear Malfunction wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀ The Auto Start/Stop function no longer To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐ switches off the engine automatically. A Check tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically Control message is displayed. It is possible to while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. continue driving. Have the system checked. The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set. Parking brake Turn signal, high beams, Applying headlight flasher The lever automatically engages after being pulled up. Turn signal The indicator lamp lights up red. The Do not adjust the exterior mirrors parking brake is set. Do not adjust the exterior mirror while Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian driving and when turn signals/hazard warning models flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐ nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐ tion and can't be seen.◀
67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 68
Controls Driving
Using turn signals High beams, headlight flasher
Press the lever beyond the resistance point. ▷ High beams, arrow 1. To switch off manually, press the lever to the ▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2. resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Washer/wiper system
Triple turn signal activation Switching the wipers on/off and brief Press the lever to the resistance point. wipe The turn signal flashes three times. Hints The function can be activated or deactivated: Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐ 1. "Settings" shield 2. "Lighting" Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen 3. "Triple turn signal" to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀ Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Do not activate wipers on dry windshield Do not use the wipers if the windshield is Signaling briefly dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or Press the lever to the resistance point and hold cause them to become worn more quickly.◀ it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. Switching on
Push wiper lever up.
68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 69
Driving Controls
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ Activating/deactivating sition when released. ▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once. The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐ hicle comes to standstill.
Switch off and brief wipe Press button on the wiper lever. Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up. When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐ intentional wiping can cause damages.◀ Push wiper lever down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ Setting the frequency or sensitivity of sition when released. the rain sensor ▷ Single wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time Turn the thumbwheel. between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror.
69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 70
Controls Driving
Clean the windshield, headlights Folding wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; other‐ wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are activated.◀ 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation.
Pull the wiper lever towards you. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ Washer fluid shield and activates the wipers briefly. Hints In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐ lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐ Antifreeze for washer fluid vated. Antifreeze is flammable and can cause Do not use the washer system at freezing injury if it is used incorrectly. temperatures Therefore, keep it away from possible sources Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze of ignition. onto the windshield which might impede your Only keep it in the closed original container viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid. and inaccessible to children. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ empty; operation might damage pump.◀ tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is Windshield washer nozzles regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ states; do not exceed the allowable washer cally heated while the ignition is switched on. fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ Fold-out position of the wipers tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ centrate or the equivalent.◀ Fold wipers back when you want to change the blades or with pending low temperatures. Adding washer fluid 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to 2. With icy conditions make sure that blades avoid contact between the washer fluid and are not frozen to the windshield. hot engine parts. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.
70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 71
Driving Controls
Washer fluid reservoir Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions
D Drive Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ ation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.
R is Reverse All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ Select only when the vehicle is stationary. ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ N Neutral: centrate and tap water and – if required – with a The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ washes, e.g. turer's recommendations. When the ignition is switched off, refer to Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the page 63, selector lever position P is engaged right mixture. automatically. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure P Park water; this could damage the wiper system. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ drive wheels are blocked. ferent manufacturers because they can clog P is engaged automatically: the windshield washer nozzles. ▷ After the engine is switched off when the Recommended minimum fill quantity: vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to 0.2 US gal/1 liter. page 63, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 63, and when selector lever position R or D is set. Manual transmission ▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐ tion N is set. Shifting ▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the Shifting into 5th or 6th gear driver's door is opened, and the brake When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐ stationary and selector lever position D or vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead R is set. to engine damage.◀ Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐ lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐ Reverse gear hicle may begin to move. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Kickdown To overcome the resistance push the selector Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐ performance. Step on the accelerator pedal verse gear.
71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 72
Controls Driving
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle ▷ Shift out of P. position. Engaging P Engaging selector lever positions Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀ ▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector lever position P until the engine is running and the brake is applied. ▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the Press button P. brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be Sport program and manual mode executed: shift lock. Activating the sport program Engaging D, R and N
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ tor lever position D. rection, beyond a resistance point if needed. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ After releasing the selector lever, it returns to vated. its center position. Activating the M/S manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D. 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., M1. Press unlock button, in order to: ▷ Engage R.
72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 73
Driving Controls
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S However, this effect is not produced via the manual mode is automatically upshifted as shift paddles when switching briefly from D to needed. manual mode.
Switching to manual mode Ending the sport program/manual ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ mode ward. Push the selector lever to the right. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ D is displayed in the instrument cluster. wards. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine Shift paddles and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐ lected gear.
Not M235i: Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode The Steptronic Sport transmission does not The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow automatically upshift in M/S manual mode you to shift gears quickly while keeping both once the maximum speed is reached, if one of hands on the steering wheel. the following conditions is met: ▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. ▷ DSC deactivated. ▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle. ▷ TRACTION activated. ▷ With the respective transmission version, ▷ SPORT+ activated. the lowest possible gear can be selected In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. by pulling and holding the left shift paddle. With the respective transmission version, the Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐ and road speeds, for example downshifting is taneously operating the kickdown and the left not possible if the engine speed is too high. shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐ The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ duced via the shift paddles when switching strument cluster, followed by the current gear. briefly from D to manual mode. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the M235i: prevent automatic upshifting transmission temporarily switches to manual in M/S manual mode mode. Once maximum engine speed is attained, up‐ If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐ shifting is not automatically performed in M/S sition D with the respective transmission ver‐ manual mode. sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐ In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. matic mode: The lowest possible gear is selected by simul‐ ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. taneously operating the kickdown and the left Or shift paddle.
73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 74
Controls Driving
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift Steptronic Sport transmission: paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. Launch Control In the manual mode, after conservative driving for a certain amount of time or if there has The concept been no acceleration or shifting of the shift Launch Control enables optimum acceleration paddles within a certain amount of time, the on surfaces with good traction. transmission switches back to automatic mode. Hints Component wear Displays in the instrument cluster Do not use Launch Control too often; The selector lever position is dis‐ otherwise, this may result in premature wear of played, e.g.: P. components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.◀ Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 152, period. Electronic unlocking of the To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC transmission lock again as soon as possible. General information An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from the danger area. Requirements Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin Launch Control is available when the engine is the engine. warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km. Engaging selector lever position N To start with Launch Control do not steer the 1. Depress the brake pedal. steering wheel. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start. Start with launch control 3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐ While the engine is running: tion N. A corresponding Check Control message 1. Press button or select Sport+ with is displayed. the Driving Dynamics Control. 4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐ TRACTION is displayed in the instrument tion N within approx. 6 seconds. cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF Position N is displayed in the instrument lights up. cluster. 2. Engage selector lever position S. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on stops. the brake. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal and secure it against moving on its own. beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.
74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 75
Driving Controls
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake. Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again.
75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 76
Controls Displays
Displays
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer 5 Electronic displays 76 2 Messages, e.g. Check Control 6 Fuel gauge 80 3 Tachometer 80 7 Reset miles 80 4 Current fuel consumption
Electronic displays ▷ Selection lists, refer to page 84. ▷ Date, refer to page 81. ▷ External temperature, refer to page 81. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 82. ▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 65. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 74. ▷ On-board computer, refer to page 85. ▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 80.
76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 77
Displays Controls
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to also be activated if objects are placed on the page 77. front passenger seat. ▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for Make sure that the safety belts are positioned Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ correctly. cation. ▷ Range, refer to page 81. Airbag system ▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to Airbag system and belt tensioner are page 114. defective. ▷ Service requirements, refer to page 82. Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ ▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 83. ice center immediately. ▷ Time, refer to page 81. Parking brake, brake system Check Control For additional information, refer to Re‐ lease parking brake, refer to page 67. The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. Front-end collision warning A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and Illuminated: advance warning is issued, text messages in the instrument cluster. e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ ger of a collision or the distance to the In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a vehicle ahead is too small. text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ play. Increase distance. Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ Indicator/warning lights ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential General information speed. The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ neuver. nations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper Pedestrian warning functioning and light up temporarily when the Symbol in the instrument cluster. engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal Safety belt reminder sounds. Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can
77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 78
Controls Displays
Yellow lights Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor Anti-lock Braking System ABS signals a loss of tire inflation pressure Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐ in a tire. ing force boost in some cases defec‐ Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid tive. Stop carefully. Take into account sudden braking and steering maneuvers. longer brake travel. Have this checked Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no by the service center immediately. flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected. DSC Dynamic Stability Control ▷ Interference through systems or devices Flashing: DSC controls the drive and with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐ ing the area of the interference, the system lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving automatically becomes active again. profile to the driving circumstances. ▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system the reset of the system again. checked by the service center. ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: For additional information, refer to Dynamic have the service center check it if needed. Stability Control DSC, refer to page 112. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction tor, refer to page 98. Control is activated Dynamic Stability Control DSC is Steering system switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐ Steering system in some cases defec‐ trol DTC is switched on. tive. For additional information, refer to Dynamic Have the steering system checked by Stability Control, refer to page 112, and Dy‐ the service center. namic Traction Control, refer to page 113.
Engine functions Flat Tire Monitor FTM Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of ice center. tire inflation pressure in a tire. For additional information, refer to On- Reduce your speed and stop cau‐ board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 192. tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐ neuvers. For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐ Lane departure warning fer to page 102. System is switched on and under cer‐ tain circumstances warns if a detected lane is left without flashing beforehand. For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐ ture warning, refer to page 109.
78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 79
Displays Controls
Green lights General lamps
Turn signal Check Control Turn signal on. At least one Check Control message is Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator displayed or is stored. The symbol is lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb shown in the display of the instrument has failed. cluster. For additional information, refer to Turn signal, refer to page 67. Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol Parking lights, headlight control in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ and warning lights. vated. Supplementary text messages Front fog lights Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up Front fog lights are activated. via Check Control. For additional information, refer to With urgent messages the added text will be Front fog lights, refer to page 93. automatically displayed on the Control Display.
High-beam Assistant Symbols High-beam Assistant is switched on. Within the supplementary text, the following High beams are activated and off auto‐ functions can be selected independent of the matically as a function of the traffic sit‐ check control message. uation. ▷ Display additional information about For additional information, refer to High-beam the Check Control message in the Assistant, refer to page 92. Integrated Owner's Manual. ▷ "Service request"
Cruise control Contact your service center. ▷ "Roadside Assistance" The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the con‐ Contact Roadside Assistance. trol elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams High beams are activated. For additional information, refer to High beams, refer to page 68.
79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 80
Controls Displays
Hiding Check Control messages Fuel gauge Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary. Depending on the equipment version, the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Hints on refueling, refer to page 168.
Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Tachometer ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning played continuously and are not cleared field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ rupted to protect the engine. eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ sages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be faded for approx. Coolant temperature 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ If the coolant along with the engine becomes played again automatically. too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. ▷ Other Check Control messages are faded Check the coolant level, refer to page 190. automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later. Odometer and trip odometer Displaying stored Check Control Display messages On the Control Display: ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message. Show/reset kilometers
Messages after trip completion Press the knob. Special messages displayed while driving are ▷ When the ignition is displayed again after the ignition is switched switched off, the time, the off. external temperature and the odometer are displayed. ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.
80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 81
Displays Controls
External temperature The Check Control message appears continu‐ ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal Refuel promptly sounds. Refuel no later than at a range of A Check Control message is 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail displayed. and damage might occur.◀ There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Ice on roads Current fuel consumption Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy. Instrument cluster Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and Displays the current fuel con‐ shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk sumption. Check whether you of an accident.◀ are currently driving in an effi‐ cient and environmentally- friendly manner. Time Instrument cluster with enhanced The time is displayed in the in‐ features strument cluster. Displays the current fuel con‐ Setting the time on the Control sumption. Check whether you Display, refer to page 87. are currently driving in an effi‐ cient and environmentally- Date friendly manner.
The date is displayed in the in‐ Displaying the current fuel strument cluster. consumption Set the date on the Control Dis‐ Depending on your vehicle's optional features, play, refer to page 88. the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐ played as bar in the instrument cluster. Range 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" Display 3. "Additional indicators" With a low remaining range: ▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly. ▷ The remaining range is shown on the computer. ▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking curves aggressively - engine operation might vary.
81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 82
Controls Displays
Energy recovery Symbols
Display Sym‐ Description bols The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy No service is currently required. while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced. The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tion is approaching. Service requirements The service deadline has already passed. The concept After the ignition is turned on the instrument Entering appointment dates cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ Enter the dates for the required inspections. nance. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are Your service specialist can read the current set correctly. service requirements from your remote con‐ On the Control Display: trol. 1. "Vehicle info" Display 2. "Vehicle status" Data regarding the service status or legally 3. "Service required" mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" cally transmitted to your service center before 5. "Date:" a service due date. 6. Adjust the settings. Detailed information on service 7. Confirm. requirements The entered date is stored. More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ Automatic Service Request play. Data regarding the service status or legally On the Control Display: mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before 1. "Vehicle info" a service due date. 2. "Vehicle status" You can check when your service center was 3. "Service required" notified. Required maintenance procedures and le‐ On the Control Display: gally mandated inspections are displayed. 1. "Vehicle info" 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"
82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 83
Displays Controls
Gear shift indicator Speed limit detection
The concept The concept The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ cient gear for the current driving situation. Speed limit detection Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ shape of a traffic sign to display the currently tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ detected speed limit. The camera in the area of tronic transmission and with manual the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs transmission. at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐ head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐ Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐ played in the instrument cluster. tected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and Manual transmission: displaying will be displayed depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information Symbol Description stored in the navigation system and also dis‐ Fuel efficient gear is set. plays speed limits present on routes without signs.
Shift up to fuel efficient gear. Hints Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute Shift down to fuel efficient gear. for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Shift into neutral. The system assists the driver and does not re‐ place the human eye.◀
At a glance Steptronic transmission: displays Camera Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror.
83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 84
Controls Displays
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the terior rearview mirror clean and clear. camera. ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation Switching on/off system are incorrect. On the Control Display: ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. 1. "Settings" ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, 2. "Instrument cluster" such as due to changes in road routing. 3. "Speed limit information" ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a If speed limit detection is switched on, it can speed sticker. be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. ment cluster via the computer. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Display The following is displayed in the instrument cluster: Selection lists in the Speed limit detection instrument cluster Current speed limit. The concept Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the following can be displayed or operated us‐ ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel and the display in the instru‐ Speed limit detection is not ment cluster: available. ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Redial phone feature. ▷ Turn on voice activation system. It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐ System limits namics Control. The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered by a sticker, etc.
84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 85
Displays Controls
Display On-board computer
Calling up information on the info display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the illustration shown. Press the onboard computer button on the Activating a list and adjusting the turn signal lever. setting Information is displayed in the info display of the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info display Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the info display: On the right side of the steering wheel, turn ▷ Range. the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ▷ Average fuel consumption. ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel. ▷ Current fuel consumption. ▷ Average speed. ▷ Date. ▷ Speed limit detection. ▷ Time of arrival. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 86
Controls Displays
When destination guidance is activated in The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ the navigation system. tomatically.
Time of arrival Adjusting the info display Depending on the vehicle equipment version, The estimated time of arrival is you can select what information from the com‐ displayed if a destination is en‐ puter is to be displayed on the info display of tered in the navigation system the instrument cluster. before the trip is started. On the Control Display: The time must be correctly set. 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" Speed limit detection 3. Select the desired displays. Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 83, function. Information in detail Trip computer Range The vehicle features two types of board com‐ Displays the estimated cruising range available puters. with the remaining fuel. ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as It is calculated based on your driving style over often as necessary. the last 20 miles/30 km. ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip. Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for Resetting the trip computer the period while the engine is running. On the Control Display: The average fuel consumption is calculated for 1. "Vehicle info" the distance traveled since the last reset by the on-board comupter. 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset. Average speed "Automatically reset": all values are reset Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a engine manually stopped are not included in standstill. the calculation of the average speed. Display on the Control Display Resetting average values Display the computer or trip computer on the Press and hold the onboard computer button Control Display. on the turn signal lever. On the Control Display:
Distance to destination 1. "Vehicle info" The distance remaining to the destination is 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ gation system before the trip is started.
86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 87
Displays Controls
Resetting the fuel consumption and Activating/deactivating the speed speed warning On the Control Display: On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 1. "Settings" 2. "Onboard info" 2. "Speed" 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" 3. "Warning" 4. "Yes" 4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the Sport displays speed warning On the Control Display: The concept 1. "Settings" On the Control Display, the current values for performance and torque can be displayed if 2. "Speed" the vehicle is appropriately equipped. 3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller. Displaying sport displays on the The current vehicle speed is stored as the Control Display speed warning. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Sport displays" Settings on the Control Display Speed warning Time The concept Displays a speed, when reached, should cause Setting the time zone a warning to be issued. 1. "Settings" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed 2. "Time/Date" drops below the set speed once by at least 3. "Time zone:" 3 mph/5 km/h. 4. Select the desired time zone. Displaying, setting or changing the The time zone is stored. speed warning On the Control Display: Setting the time 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 2. "Speed" 3. "Time:" 3. "Warning at:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours 4. Turn the controller until the desired speed are displayed. is displayed. 5. Press the controller. 5. Press the controller. Speed warning is stored.
87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 88
Controls Displays
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ Language nutes are displayed. 7. Press the controller. Setting the language The time is stored. To set the language on the Control Display: 1. "Settings" Setting the time format 2. "Language/Units" 1. "Settings" 3. "Language:" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Select the desired language. 3. "Format:" Settings are stored for the profile currently in 4. Select the desired format. use. The time format is stored. Setting the voice dialog Automatic time setting Voice dialog for the voice activation system, Depending on your vehicle's optional features, refer to page 28. the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are updated automatically. Units of measure 1. "Settings" Setting the units of measure 2. "Time/Date" To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ 3. "Auto time set" distance and temperature:
Date 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" Setting the date 3. Select the desired menu item. 1. "Settings" 4. Select the desired unit. 2. "Time/Date" Settings are stored for the profile currently in 3. "Date:" use. 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed. Brightness 5. Press the controller. Setting the brightness 6. Make the necessary settings for the month To set the brightness of the Control Display: and year. The date is stored. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" Setting the date format 3. "Brightness" 1. "Settings" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ 2. "Time/Date" ness is set. 3. "Format:" 5. Press the controller. 4. Select the desired format. Settings are stored for the profile currently in The date format is stored. use.
88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 89
Displays Controls
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible.
89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 90
Controls Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Parking lights/low beams, This chapter describes all standard, country- headlight control specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not General information necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Position of switch: , , the selected options or country versions. This If the driver door is opened with the ignition also applies to safety-related functions and switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ systems. The respectively applicable country cally switched off at these switch settings. provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Parking lights Position of switch : the vehicle's lights Overview light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to start the en‐ gine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to page 91.
Low beams Position of switch with the ignition 1 Rear fog lights switched on: the low beams light up. 2 Front fog lights 3 Depending on the equipment: automatic Welcome lights headlight control, Adaptive Light Control, When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights, position or : parking and interior lights Daytime running lights come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked 4 Lights off, daytime running lights depending on the ambient brightness. 5 Parking lights, daytime running lights Activating/deactivating 6 Depending on the equipment: low beams, 1. "Settings" welcome lights, High-beam Assistant 2. "Lighting" 7 Instrument lighting 3. "Welcome lights" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.
90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 91
Lights Controls
Headlight courtesy delay feature Activating/deactivating The low beams stay lit for a short while if the In some countries, daytime running lights are headlight flasher is switched on after the radio- mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ ready state is switched off. vate the daytime running lights. 1. "Settings" Setting the duration 2. "Lighting" 1. "Settings" 3. "Daytime running lamps" 2. "Lighting" Settings are stored for the profile currently in 3. "Pathway lighting:" use. 4. Set length of time. Settings are stored for the profile currently in Roadside parking lights use.
Automatic headlight control Position of switch : the low beams are acti‐ vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on The low beams always stay on when the fog With the ignition switched off, press the lever lights are activated. either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Personal responsibility The automatic headlight control cannot Switch off serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in ment in determining when to turn the lights on the opposite direction. in response to ambient lighting conditions. E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under Adaptive Light Control these conditions, you should always switch on the lights manually.◀ The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight Daytime running lights control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ tion of the road surface. ning lights light up in position , or Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ . After the ignition is switched off, the park‐ rameters, the light from the headlight follows ing lights light up in position . the course of the road.
91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 92
Controls Lights
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐ when turning, one of the two front fog lights is tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀ switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the inside of the curve is better lighted. Activating Activating Position of switch with the ignition switched on. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. The turning lights are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light When driving in reverse, the turning lights may switch into position or . be automatically switched on regardless of the 2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐ steering angle. row.
Malfunction The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐ failed. Have the system checked as soon as tomatically brightened or dimmed. possible. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. High-beam Assistant The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ The concept ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. Depend‐ When the low beams are activated, this system ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, automatically switches the high beams on and the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ off or suppresses the light in the areas that ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, trolled by a camera on the front of the interior the blue indicator light will stay on. rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are activated whenever the traffic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams non and off as usual.
Note Personal responsibility The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐ ment of when to use the high beams. There‐
92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 93
Lights Controls
Switching the high beams on and off Fog lights manually Front fog lights The low beams must be switched on. Press button. The green indicator lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 91, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights. ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. When the high beams or headlight flasher are ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. activated, the front fog lights are not switched on. The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐ vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ Instrument lighting ton on the turn signal lever. Adjusting System limits The parking lights or low beams The system is not fully functional in situations must be switched on to adjust such as the following, and driver intervention the brightness. may be necessary: Adjust the brightness with the ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, thumbwheel. such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or Interior lights ship traffic; and at animal crossings. General information ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights coming traffic on freeways. and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐ cally. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ trols brightness of some of these features. ▷ At low speeds. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc.
93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 94
Controls Lights
Overview Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐ justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 4. Adjust the brightness. 1 Interior lights 2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lights on and off Press button.
To reel off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button.
Reading lights Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear next to the interior lights.
Ambient light Depending on your optional features lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Selecting color scheme On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" 4. Select desired setting. With a color scheme selected and welcome lights activated they illuminate in the line's color when vehicle is unlocked.
94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 95
Safety Controls
Safety
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area. which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate restraint. Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.
95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 96
Controls Safety
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads The head airbag system is designed as an away from the side airbag and do not rest ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants might occur when airbag is activated. through side windows during rollovers or side ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. impact events. ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ Knee airbag bag cover panels, do not cover them or The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal modify them in any way. impact. ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. Protective action This also applies to steering wheel covers, Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end and the sides of the roofliner.◀ collisions. Even when you follow all instructions very Information on how to ensure the optimal closely, injury from contact with the airbags protective effect of the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the short-term and, in most cases, temporary steering wheel rim, holding your hands at hearing impairment in sensitive individuals. the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐ keep the risk of injury to your hands or ploying the airbags arms as low as possible when the airbag is Do not touch the individual components imme‐ triggered. diately after the system has been triggered; ▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐ otherwise, you may risk burns. jects between an airbag and a person. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the front passenger side as a storage area. the service center or an authorized repair shop ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front for handling explosives. passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tach adhesive labels or coverings and do tem could lead to failure in an emergency or not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS unintentional activation of the airbag - both devices or' mobile phones. may lead to injury.◀ ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ Warnings and information on the airbags are ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and also found on the sun visors. legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries might occur when front airbag is activated. Functional readiness of the airbag ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or system other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐ with integrated side airbags. ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐ ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 97
Safety Controls
erational readiness of the entire airbag system In this case, change the sitting position so that and the belt tensioner. the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. Airbag system malfunctioning If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on. To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐ or other items to the front passenger seat tem checked immediately. unless they are specifically recommended In case of a malfunction have airbag system by your vehicle's manufacturer. checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the that the system does not function as expected passenger seat if a child restraint system is in case of a severe accident.◀ to be installed on it. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that Automatic deactivation of the front- could press against the seat from below. seat passenger airbags ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ Indicator lamp for the front-seat sistance. passenger airbags Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ vated. Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, proper functioning of the front passenger air‐ bag might not be assured.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ passenger seat ger airbags indicates the operating state of the Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ front-seat passenger airbags. senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ structions for children on the front passenger ther activated or deactivated. seat, see Children.◀ ▷ The indicator lamp lights up Malfunction of the automatic when a child is properly deactivation system seated in a child restraint fix‐ When transporting older children and adults, ing system or when the seat the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ is empty. The airbags on the tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, front passenger side are not the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger activated. airbags lights up. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 98
Controls Safety
size is detected on the seat. The airbags Unobstructed area of movement on the front passenger side are activated. Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury Detected child seats or damage to objects.◀ The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM factured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat The concept passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the The system monitors tire inflation pressure in front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one Strength of the driver's and front-seat or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the passenger airbag tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature. The explosive power that activates driver's/ front passenger's airbags very much depends Hints on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ er's seat. Tire damage due to external factors With a respective message appearing on Con‐ Sudden tire damage caused by external trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ the accuracy of this function over the long- vance.◀ term. With use of the system observe further infor‐ mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ Calibrating the front seats fer to page 172. A corresponding message appears on the Control Display. Functional requirements 1. Press the reel and move the respective The system must have been reset with the seat all the way forward. correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is 2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still not assured. moves forward slightly. Reset the system after each adjustment of the 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. tire inflation pressure and after every tire or The calibration procedure is completed when wheel change. the message on the Control Display disap‐ Always use wheels with TPM electronics to pears. ensure that the system will operate properly. If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ peat the calibration. Status display If the message does not disappear after a re‐ The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ soon as possible. play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status"
98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 99
Safety Controls
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" 5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform The status is displayed. reset". 6. Drive away. Status control display The tires are shown in gray and the status is Tire and system status are indicated by the displayed. color of the wheels and a text message on the After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a Control Display. short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The reset is All wheels green completed automatically while driving. System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ The progress of the reset is displayed. tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during After a successfully completed Reset, the the last reset. wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) One wheel is yellow active" is displayed. A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in You may interrupt this trip at any time. When the indicated tire. you continue the reset resumes automatically. All wheels are yellow Low tire pressure message A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. Wheels, gray ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a tire inflation pressure. malfunction. ▷ No reset was performed for the system. The system therefore issues a warning Status information based on the tire inflation pressures before The status control display additionally shows the last reset. the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. actual values read; they may vary depending Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ on driving style or weather conditions. vers. Carry out reset 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or Run-flat tires, refer to page 180, are la‐ wheel change. beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. On the Control Display and on the vehicle: Do not continue driving without run-flat 1. "Vehicle info" tires 2. "Vehicle status" Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 3. "Perform reset" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving 4. Start the engine - do not drive off. may result in serious accidents.◀ A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 100
Controls Safety
Actions in the event of a flat tire A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. Normal tires A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ 1. Identify the damaged tire. ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during Do this by checking the air pressure in all braking, a longer braking distance and different four tires. self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may potholes, etc. not have been initialized. In this case, initi‐ alize the system. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the If an identification is not possible, please trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ contact the service center. ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ 2. Rectify the flat tire on the damaged wheel. ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, Continued driving with a flat tire may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the Drive moderately and do not exceed a next opportunity and have them replaced if speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. needed. Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ Run-flat tires duced when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will Maximum speed change.◀
You may continue driving with a damaged tire Final tire failure at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving Continued driving with a flat tire can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: could come loose and cause an accident. Do 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ not continue driving and contact your service vers. center.◀ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Required tire inflation pressure check 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at message the next opportunity. A Check Control message is displayed in the If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires following situations is shown to be correct, it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform ▷ The system has detected a wheel change, a reset. In that case, carry out a reset. but no reset was done. Possible driving distance with complete loss of ▷ Inflation was not carried out according to tire inflation pressure: specifications. The possible driving distance after a loss of tire ▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ the level of the last confirmation. ing style and road conditions. In this case:
100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 101
Safety Controls
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle needed. placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your ▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire vehicle has tires of a different size than the size change. indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the System limits proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has The system does not function properly if a re‐ been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ reported though tire inflation pressures are sure telltale when one or more of your tires is correct. significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when The tire inflation pressure depends on the the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the should stop and check your tires as soon as sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated inflation pressure is reduced when the tire tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to temperature falls again. These circumstances tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ may cause a warning when temperatures fall ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the very sharply. vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for Malfunction proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's The yellow warning lamp flashes and responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, then lights up continuously. A Check even if under-inflation has not reached the Control message is displayed. No flat level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also tected. been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ Display in the following situations: ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: tor is combined with the low tire pressure have the service center check it if needed. telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ your service center. nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ Reset the system again. function exists. When the malfunction indicator ▷ Interference through systems or devices is illuminated, the system may not be able to with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. ing the area of the interference, the system TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of automatically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels Each tire, including the spare (if provided) on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS flated to the inflation pressure recommended to continue to function properly.
101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 102
Controls Safety
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 4. Start the engine - do not drive off. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". The concept 6. Drive away. The system detects tire inflation pressure loss The initialization is completed while driving, on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ which can be interrupted at any time. tween the individual wheels while driving. The initialization automatically continues when In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the driving resumes. diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. This will be Indication of a flat tire detected and reported as a flat tire. The yellow warning lamp lights up. A The system does not measure the actual infla‐ Check Control message is displayed. tion pressure in the tires. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire Functional requirements inflation pressure. The system must have been initialized when 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ vers. sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with tion of the tire inflation pressure and after regular tires or run-flat tires. every tire or wheel change. Run-flat tires, refer to page 180, are la‐ Status display beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., Do not continue driving without run-flat whether or not the FTM is active. tires 1. "Vehicle info" Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving 2. "Vehicle status" may result in serious accidents.◀ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ The status is displayed. bility Control is switched on if needed.
Initialization System limits When initializing the once set inflation tire Sudden tire damage pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ Sudden serious tire damage caused by firming the tire inflation pressures. external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.◀ Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains. A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all On the Control Display: four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. 1. "Vehicle info" The system could be delayed or malfunction in 2. "Vehicle status" the following situations: 3. "Perform reset" ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 103
Safety Controls
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road A vehicle with an average load has a possible surface. driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during ▷ When driving with snow chains. braking, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving Actions in the event of a flat tire style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, Normal tires potholes, etc. 1. Identify the damaged tire. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the Do this by checking the air pressure in all trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ four tires. ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize Continued driving with a flat tire the system. Drive moderately and do not exceed a If an identification is not possible, please speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. contact the service center. Your car handles differently when you lose tire 2. Rectify the flat tire on the damaged wheel. inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ duced when braking, braking distances are Run-flat tires longer and the self-steering properties will change.◀
Maximum speed Final tire failure You may continue driving with a damaged tire Vibrations or loud noises while driving at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire Continued driving with a flat tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: not continue driving and contact your service center.◀ 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Intelligent Safety 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. The concept If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires Intelligent Safety enables central operation of is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not the driver assistance system. have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐ Possible driving distance with complete loss of tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐ tire inflation pressure: sion. These systems are active automatically The possible driving distance after a loss of tire every time the engine is started using the inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ Start/Stop button: ing style and road conditions.
103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 104
Controls Safety
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐ Intelligent Safety button ing function, refer to page 104. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 107. Camera Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ adapt his or her driving speed and style to the terior rearview mirror clean and clear. traffic conditions.◀ Switching on/off Be alert The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ Due to system limitations, warnings may cally active after every departure. be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and Press button: the systems are turned ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk off. The LED goes out. of an accident.◀ Press button: the systems are turned on. The LED lights up. Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Settings can be made on the Control Display. Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ Front-end collision warning with City Braking function At a glance The concept Button in the vehicle The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently if needed. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. A camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system.
104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 105
Safety Controls
The front-end collision warning is available Be alert even if cruise control has been deactivated. Due to system limitations, warnings may With the vehicle approaching another vehicle be not issued at all, or may be issued late or intentionally the collision warning is delayed improperly. Therefore, always be alert and avoiding false alarm. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ General information Tow-starting and towing The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. For tow-starting or towing, switch off the 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ the current driving situation. tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h. At a glance Detection range Button in the vehicle
It responds to objects if they are detected by the system. Intelligent Safety button
Hints Camera Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system The camera is found near the interior rearview do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to mirror. adapt his or her driving speed and style to the Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ traffic conditions.◀ terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 106
Controls Safety
Switching on/off Prewarning This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the Switching on automatically impending danger of a collision or the distance The system is automatically active after every to the vehicle ahead is too small. driving-off. The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning. Switch off Press button: the system is switched Acute warning with braking function off. The LED goes out. Warning of the imminent danger of a collision Re-press button: the system is switched on. when the vehicle approaches another object at The LED lights up. a relatively high differential speed. The driver must intervene actively when there Setting the warning time is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ The warning time can be set via iDrive. vention in a possible risk of collision. 1. "Settings" Acute warnings can also be triggered without 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" previous prewarning. 3. Activate the desired time on the Control Braking intervention Display. The warning prompts the driver himself/herself The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ rently in use. ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on Warning with braking function the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a Display collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ come to a complete stop. nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. vention up to a complete stop, the engine may Symbol Measure be shut down.
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ The braking intervention is executed only if ing. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ Brake and increase distance. vated. The vehicle flashes red and an The braking intervention can be interrupted by acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ ing. tively moving the steering wheel. You are requested to intervene by Object detection can be restricted. Limitations braking or make an evasive maneu‐ of the detection range and functional restric‐ ver. tions are to be considered.
106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 107
Safety Controls
System limits Pedestrian warning with city braking function Detection range The system's detection potential is limited. The concept Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐ sued late. destrians. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ The system issues a warning in the city driving tected: speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach lision with pedestrians and includes a braking them at high speed. function. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of The camera in the area of the rearview mirror you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. controls the system. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. General information ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐ Functional limitations sions with pedestrians at speeds from about 6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h The system may not be fully functional in the shortly before a collision the system supports following situations: you with a braking intervention. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ Under those circumstances it reacts to people fall. who are within the detection range of the sys‐ ▷ In tight curves. tem. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. Detection range ▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐ ror is dirty or obscured. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky. The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas. Warning sensitivity ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the The more sensitive the warning settings are, vehicle. e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and cess of false warnings. left. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within
107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 108
Controls Safety
the extended area only if they are moving in Intelligent Safety button the direction of the central area.
Camera Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style The camera is found near the interior rearview The displays and warnings of the system mirror. do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ adapt his or her driving speed and style to the terior rearview mirror clean and clear. traffic conditions.◀
Be alert Switching on/off Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or Switching on automatically improperly. Therefore, always be alert and The system is automatically active after every ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk driving-off. of an accident.◀
Tow-starting and towing Switch off For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Press button: the systems are turned Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ off. The LED goes out. tions of the individual braking systems might Press button: the systems are turned on. The lead to accidents.◀ LED lights up.
At a glance Warning with braking function
Button in the vehicle Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.
108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 109
Safety Controls
Braking intervention ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ The warning prompts the driver himself/herself fall. to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ▷ In tight curves. ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. the brake pedal. The system can assist with ▷ If the camera viewing field or the front some braking intervention if there is risk of a windshield are dirty or covered. collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob. Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ be shut down. ately after vehicle shipment. The braking intervention is executed only if ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ low in the sky. vated. ▷ When it is dark outside. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. Lane departure warning Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric‐ The concept tions are to be considered. Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane System limits markings is about to leave the lane. This speed, depending on the country version, is Detection range between 35 mph/55 km/h and The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ 45 mph/70 km/h. ited. When switching on the system below this Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ sued late. ment cluster. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in tected: the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. uation. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such The system does not provide a warning if the because of the viewing angle or contour. turn signal is set before leaving the lane. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than Hints 32 in/80 cm. Personal responsibility
Functional limitations The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the The system may not be fully functional or may course of the road and the traffic situation. not be available in the following situations:
109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 110
Controls Safety
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ Display in the instrument cluster ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ ▷ Lines: system is activated. cle.◀ ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be At a glance issued. Button in the vehicle Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning The warning ends: Lane departure warning ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane.
Camera ▷ When braking hard. ▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. The camera is found near the interior rearview ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, mirror. ice, dirt or water. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. terior rearview mirror clean and clear. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by objects. Switching on/off ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in Press button. front of you. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior ▷ Off: the LED goes out. rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment.
110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 111
Safety Controls
Brake force display After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of The concept alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐ ior. ▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen‐ dation to take a break.
▷ During normal brake application, the bot‐ Break recommendation tom brake lights light up. If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or ▷ During heavy brake application, the top fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control brake lights light up in addition. Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed Attentiveness assistant only once during an uninterrupted trip. After a break, another recommendation to take The concept a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ mately 45 minutes. ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this System limits situation, it is recommended that the driver The function may be limited in the following takes a break. situations, for instance, and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: Note ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. Personal responsibility ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below The system cannot act as a substitute for about 43 mph/70 km/h. the personal assessment of one's physical ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during state and may not detect an increasing lack of rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is changing lanes frequently. rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐ tected too late and an accident be caused as a ▷ When the road surface is poor. result.◀ ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Function The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off.
111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 112
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within This chapter describes all standard, country- the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐ specific and optional features offered with the cle on a steady course by reducing engine series. It also describes features that are not speed and by applying brakes to the individual necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to wheels. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Note systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the Adjust your driving style to the situation respective features and systems. An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not Antilock Brake System ABS even with DSC. ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety braking. margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ The vehicle contains its steering power even Do not deactivate DSC when driving with during full brake applications, thus increasing roof load active safety. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roof- gine. mounted luggage rack. Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐ ing-critical situation due to the elevated center Brake assistant of gravity.◀ When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the greatest possible Overview braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ tance to a minimum during emergency stop. Button in the vehicle This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The concept DSC OFF button DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating.
112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 113
Driving stability control systems Controls
Indicator/warning lights The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces, The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ trols the drive and braking forces. what limited driving stability. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC failed. provides maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF curves. When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is Therefore drive with appropriate caution. reduced during acceleration and when driving You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in curves. under the following special circumstances: To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, again as soon as possible. snow-covered roads. Deactivating DSC ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds. Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. Traction Control The DSC system is switched off. The steering and, depending on the equip‐ Activating DTC ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. Press button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ Activating DSC ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC Press button. OFF lights up. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. Deactivating DTC Press button again. Indicator/warning lights TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ tor lamp go out. played in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated. xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC DTC Dynamic Traction further optimize traction and driving dynamics. Control The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ tributes the drive forces to the front and rear The concept axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface. The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized.
113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 114
Controls Driving stability control systems
Dynamic Damping Control Servotronic
The concept The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐ tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ quired to turn the wheels in accordance with eling on uneven road surfaces. the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering The system enhances driving dynamics and force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐ comfort fitting road surface and driving style. ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐ creases, the assistance of the steering force is Programs reduced. The system offers several different programs. Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐ ing to the driving program, so that a direct, Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐ Control, refer to page 114. veyed. SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ Driving Dynamics Control sorbers for greater driving agility. The concept SPORT+ The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine- Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐ sorbers for greater driving agility when driving ous programs can be selected for this purpose. with limited driving stabilization. The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate a COMFORT/ECO PRO program. Balanced control of the vehicle. Overview
Variable sport steering Button in the vehicle The variable sport steering increases the steering angle of the front wheels at large steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or when parking. Steering becomes more direct. It also varies the force required to turn the wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. This results in a sporty steering response. In addition, it becomes easier to steer during parking and maneuvering.
114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 115
Driving stability control systems Controls
Operating the programs Activating SPORT+ Press button repeatedly until SPORT+ Press button Program appears in the instrument cluster and DSC OFF the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up. TRACTION Automatic program change SPORT+ When activating cruise control, the program SPORT automatically switches to SPORT mode. COMFORT ECO PRO Indicator/warning lights SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. Automatic program change The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: The system may automatically switch to COM‐ Dynamic Traction Control is activated. FORT in the following situations: ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. SPORT ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control. Depending on the equipment, consistently ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ engine control for greater driving agility with TION or DSC OFF mode. maximum driving stabilization. The program can be configured to individual DSC OFF specifications. The configuration is stored for When DSC OFF, refer to page 113, is active, the profile currently in use. driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. Activating SPORT Press button repeatedly until SPORT TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster. When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Configuring SPORT Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 113, is When the display is activated on the Control activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ Display, refer to page 116, the SPORT driving celeration and when driving in curves. mode can be set to individual specifications. SPORT+ ▷ Activating SPORT. Sporty driving with optimized suspension and ▷ "Configure SPORT" adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ ▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode. bilization. SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. vated:
The driver handles several of the stabilization 1. "Settings" tasks. 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure SPORT" 4. Configure driving mode.
115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 116
Controls Driving stability control systems
This configuration is retrieved when the Displays SPORT driving mode is activated. Program selection COMFORT Pressing the button displays a For a balanced tuning with maximum driving list of the selectable programs. stabilization. Depending on your vehicle's op‐ tional features, the list in the in‐ Activating COMFORT strument cluster can differ from Press button repeatedly until COM‐ the illustration shown. FORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. Selected program In certain situations, the system automatically The instrument cluster displays changes to the NORMAL program, automatic the selected program. program change, refer to page 115.
ECO PRO ECO PRO, refer to page 159, provides consis‐ tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for Display on the Control Display maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ Program changes can be displayed on the zation. Control Display. Comfort functions and the engine controller 1. "Settings" are adjusted. 2. "Control display" The program can be configured to individual 3. "Driving mode info" specifications.
Activating ECO PRO Drive-off assistant Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument This system supports driving off on inclines. cluster. The parking brake is not required. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot Configuring ECO PRO brake. 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐ out delay. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is Make the desired settings. held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Configuring driving program For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐ sions, the possible holding duration amounts Settings can be made for the following driving to 2 minutes. programs in Driving mode: Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer ▷ SPORT, refer to page 115. is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. ▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 160.
116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 117
Driving stability control systems Controls
Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll back.◀
117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 118
Controls Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard, country- Buttons on the steering wheel specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Press button Function necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This System on/off, interrupt also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country Store speed provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Resume speed
Cruise control rocker switch: change, hold, store speed The concept The system maintains a preset speed via the Controls buttons on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking Switching on is insufficient. Press button on the steering wheel. General information The marking in the speedometer is set to the Depending on the driving settings, the features current speed. of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Cruise control can be used.
Hints Switch off Unfavorable conditions Deactivated or interrupted system Do not use the system if unfavorable With deactivated or interrupted system conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ use your brakes, steering and moves as usual stant speed, e.g.: to avoid the chance of an accident.◀ ▷ On winding roads. Press button. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or ▷ If active: press twice. on a loose road surface. ▷ If interrupted: press once. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ The displays go out. The stored desired speed cle and cause an accident.◀ is deleted.
118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 119
Driving comfort Controls
Interrupting When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired When active, press the button. speed. This is displayed, refer to page 120, in the The system is automatically interrupted if: speedometer and briefly in the instrument ▷ The brakes are applied. cluster. ▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few When cruise control is maintained or stored, seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned gaged. on if needed. ▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ rent speed. Changing the speed ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated until the desired speed is set. or DSC is deactivated. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed Maintaining, storing, and changing the increases or decreases by approx. speed 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed Hints past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ Adjusting the desired speed mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Modify desired speed to road conditions The maximum speed that can be set de‐ and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, pends on the vehicle. there is the risk of an accident.◀ ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ Maintaining/storing the speed celerates the vehicle without requiring Press button. pressure on the accelerator pedal. Or: After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed Press button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted.
119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 120
Controls Driving comfort
Displays in the instrument cluster The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐ stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. Indicator lamp 6 ft/2 m. Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ An acoustic warning is first given: ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. tem is switched on. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. Desired speed To ensure full functionality: ▷ The marking lights up green: ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, the system is active. bicycle racks. ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ange: the system has been ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not interrupted. spray the sensors for long periods and ▷ The marking does not light up: the system maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. is switched off. Hints Brief status display Personal responsibility Selected desired speed. Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Technically the system has its limits, it cannot Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ independently react to all traffic situations. tem requirements are currently not ready for Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe operations. the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed - risk of accident.◀
PDC Park Distance Control Avoid driving fast with PDC Avoid approaching an object too fast. The concept Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐ PDC is a support when parking. When you tive. slowly approach an object in the rear - or also in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ For technical reasons, the system may other‐ ble - then the object is reported through: wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ ▷ Signal tones. ▷ Visual display.
General information Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure the distances from objects.
120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 121
Driving comfort Controls
Overview With front PDC: switching on/off manually With front PDC: button in vehicle Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The rearview camera image is displayed when the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the button.
Display
PDC Park Distance Control Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E. g. Switching on/off if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear Switching on automatically speaker. PDC switches on automatically in the following The shorter the distance to the object, the situations: shorter the intervals. ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged If the distance to a detected object is less than when the engine is running. approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is The rearview camera also switches on. sounded. ▷ If equipped with parking assistant: when With front PDC: if objects are located both in obstacles are detected behind or in front of front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower continuous signal is sounded. than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The signal tone is switched off, when selector You may turn off automatic activation: lever position P is engaged on vehicles with 1. "Settings" Steptronic transmission. 2. "Parking" Volume 3. Select setting. The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐ Settings are stored for the profile currently justed similar to the sound and volume set‐ in use. tings of the radio. Settings are stored for the profile currently in Automatic deactivation during forward use. travel The system switches off when a certain driving Visual warning distance or speed is exceeded. The approach of the vehicle to an object can Switch the system back on if needed. be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds.
121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 122
Controls Driving comfort
A display appears as soon as Park Distance False warnings Control (PDC) is activated. PDC may issue a warning under the following The range of the sensors is represented in the conditions even though there is no obstacle colors green, yellow and red. within the detection range: When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ ▷ In heavy rain. played, the reel can be made to PDC: ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered "Rear view camera" with ice. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. System limits ▷ On rough road surfaces. Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: ▷ In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ ▷ For small children and animals. rages. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. ▷ In automatic car washes. coats. ▷ Through heavy pollution. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., machines. sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position. The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐ ous tone alternating between the front and ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐ treme heat or strong wind. ger present, the system is again fully func‐ ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other tional. vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. Malfunction ▷ With moving objects. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded ledges or cargo. area on the Control Display. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure To ensure full functionality: such as fences. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. ▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can sors. move into the blind area of the sensors before ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not or after a continuous tone sounds. spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 123
Driving comfort Controls
Rearview camera Clean the camera lens, refer to page 211.
The concept Switching on/off The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area Switching on automatically behind the vehicle is shown on the Control With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ Display. tion P R.
Hints Automatic deactivation during forward Check the traffic situation as well travel Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ The system switches off when a certain driving hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ distance or speed is exceeded. dent could result from road users or objects Switch the system back on if needed. that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ Switching on/off manually At a glance Press button.
Button in the vehicle ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. The rearview camera image is displayed when the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the button.
Switching the view via iDrive With PDC activated: Rearview camera "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.
Camera Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac‐ tive at the same time. ▷ Parking aid lines The camera lens is located in the handle of the tail gate. The image quality may be impaired by "Parking aid lines" dirt. Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 124
Controls Driving comfort
▷ Obstacle marking Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. Their colored margins match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐ ▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the tance to the object shown. image of the rearview camera. ▷ They help you to estimate how much Parking using pathway and turning space is needed when parking and maneu‐ radius lines vering on level pavement. 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ ▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐ dius lines lead to within the limits of the ing angle and are continuously adjusted to parking space. the steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line.
▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐ posed on the rearview camera image to‐ gether with pathway lines. ▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐ sible turning radius on a level road. ▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐ ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐ tain angle.
124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 125
Driving comfort Controls
Display settings The system supports parking in the following situations: Brightness ▷ When parking parallel to the road. With the rearview camera switched on: ▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the 1. Select the symbol. road. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces is reached, and press the controller. on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ Contrast sible parking line and takes control of steering With the rearview camera switched on: during the parking procedure. When parking, also take note of the visual and 1. Select the symbol. acoustic information and instructions issued 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐ is reached, and press the controller. view camera and react accordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the System limits PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 120. Detection of objects Hints Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by Personal responsibility the system. Even an active system does not relieve Assistance functions also take into account the driver from personal responsibility while data of the PDC. driving. Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to Technically the system has its limits, it cannot page 120. independently react to all traffic situations. The objects displayed on the Control Display Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe under certain circumstances are closer than the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and they appear. Do not estimate the distance from react when needed - risk of accident.◀ the objects on the display. Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was Parking assistant measured are not taken into account by the system. The concept Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀
Transporting cargo Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀
125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
Curbs ▷ Parking brake released. The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the cle over or onto curb if need be. driver's side, the corresponding turn signal Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ must be set where applicable. vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ cle may become damaged.◀ Overview
An engine that has been switched off by the Button in the vehicle Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐ cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Parking assistant Suitable parking space General information: Ultrasound sensors ▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length of 1.7 ft/0.5 m. ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m. Parallel parking to the road: ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. The four ultrasound sensors for measuring Diagonal parking: parking spaces are located in the front and rear ▷ Width of gap between two objects: your on the side of the vehicle. vehicle's width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m up To ensure full functionality: to maximum 16 ft/5 m. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not The depth of diagonal parking spaces must spray the sensors for long periods and be estimated by the driver. Dur to technical maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. limitations, the system can approximate the depth of diagonal parking spaces only. ▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
Regarding the parking procedure ▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.
126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 127
Driving comfort Controls
Switching on/off ▷ Symbol P, refer to Arrow, on the vehicle il‐ lustrated. Parking assistant is activated and Switching on with the button search for parking space active. Press button. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the The LED lights up. vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant The current status of the parking space search is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ is indicated on the Control Display. lighted. Parking assistant is activated automatically. ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly detected, the system automatically Switching on with the reverse gear adjusts the suitable parking method. In the case of parking spaces suitable for parallel Shift into reverse. and diagonal parking, a selection menu is The current status of the parking space search displayed. In this case, the desired parking is indicated on the Control Display. method must be selected manually. To activate: "Parking Assistant" ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ tive. Steering control has Switch off been taken over by system. The system can be deactivated as follows: ▷ Press button. ▷ Parking space search is always active ▷ Switch off the ignition. whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ Display on the Control Display activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are System activated/deactivated shown in gray.
Symbol Meaning Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well Gray: the system is not available. Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐ White: the system is available but hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and not activated. PDC's signals. The system is activated. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐ System status ger of an accident.◀ 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ vate it if needed. The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary
127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 128
Controls Driving comfort
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering Follow the instructions on the Control Display wheel move. to do this. The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display. System limits 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if No parking assistance needed. The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ Interrupting manually tance in the following situations: The parking assistant can be interrupted at any ▷ In tight curves. time: ▷ When DSC is deactivated. ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display. Functional limitations ▷ Press button. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel Interrupting automatically roads. The system is interrupted automatically in the ▷ On slippery ground. following situations: ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the he takes over steering. parking space. ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the Control Display. Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. Ultrasonic measuring might not function under 6 mph/10 km/h. the following circumstances: ▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road ▷ For small children and animals. surfaces. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to coats. overcome, such as curbs. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud arise. machines. ▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ clearances that are too small. aged or out of position. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as or the time taken for parking is exceeded. high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ ▷ If DSC is being deactivated. treme heat or strong wind. ▷ When switching to another function on the ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other Control Display. vehicles. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. Resume ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ ledges or cargo. tinued if needed.
128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 129
Driving comfort Controls
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.
129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 130
Controls Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 51 6 Temperature 2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 51 3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function 4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode 5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
Hints the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 131
Climate control Controls
Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 131, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ Manual air distribution gram. Turn the wheel to select the de‐ Temperature sired program or the desired in‐ termediate setting. Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.
▷ Windows. ▷ Upper body region. The automatic climate control reaches this ▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐ temperature as quickly as possible, if needed well. by increasing the cooling or heating output, ▷ Footwell. and then keeps it constant. Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ Defrosts windows and removes perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ condensation mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ just the set temperature. crease the air flow and temperature, and, if needed, use the cooling function. Cooling function The car's interior can only be cooled with the Rear window defroster engine running. Press button. Press button. The rear window defroster switches The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ off automatically after a certain period of time. fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ ting, warmed again. Air flow, manual Depending on the weather, the windshield and Press the left or right side of the but‐ side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. gine is started. The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ The cooling function is switched on automati‐ duced automatically to save battery power. cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, AUTO program condensation water, refer to page 154, devel‐ Press button. ops that exits underneath the vehicle. Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ Recirculated-air mode ture are controlled automatically. You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ Depending on the selected temperature and tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ outside influences, the air is directed to the rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The windshield, side windows, upper body, and system then recirculates the air currently into the footwell. within the vehicle.
131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 132
Controls Climate control
Press button repeatedly to select an Switching the system on/off operating mode: Switch off ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Press the left button for the minimum ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply speed. of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ nently blocked. Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ Switching on cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ Press any button except tain amount of time in order to avoid window ▷ Rear window defroster. fogging. ▷ Seat heating. If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if Microfilter needed. In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ Sufficient ventilation crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ This filter should be replaced during scheduled tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ maintenance, refer to page 191, of your vehi‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ cle. culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 51 2 Temperature, left
132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 133
Climate control Controls
3 AUTO program 10 Air distribution, right 4 Display 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity 5 Maximum cooling 12 Air distribution, left 6 Temperature, right 13 Rear window defroster 7 Seat heating, right 51 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep 8 Cooling function clear 9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ 15 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐ lated-air mode tion
Hints Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ Sufficient ventilation ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ windows, upper body, and into the footwell. tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ The cooling function, refer to page 134, is nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in gram. the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible. Climate control functions in detail Intensity of the AUTO program Temperature With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ Turn the ring to set the desired matic intensity control can be changed. temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ sity.
The automatic climate control reaches this The selected intensity is shown on the display temperature as quickly as possible, if needed of the automatic climate control. by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant. Maximum cooling Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ Press button. perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ The system is set to the lowest tem‐ just the set temperature. perature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode. AUTO program Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ Press button. gion. The vents need to be open for this. Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ The function is available above an external ture are controlled automatically. temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the engine running. Adjust air flow with the program active.
133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 134
Controls Climate control
Cooling function Sufficient ventilation The car's interior can only be cooled with the When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ engine running. tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ Press button. culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ dow condensation increases.◀ ting, warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and Manual air distribution side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ Press button repeatedly to select a gine is started. program: The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. ▷ Upper body region. When using the automatic climate control, ▷ Upper body region and footwell. condensation water, refer to page 154, devel‐ ▷ Footwell. ops that exits underneath the vehicle. ▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only. ▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell: Automatic recirculated-air control/ driver's side only. recirculated-air mode If the windows are fogged over, press the You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ sor. rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently Air flow, manual within the vehicle. To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐ Press button repeatedly to select an gram first. operating mode: Press the left or right side of the but‐ ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ton: decrease or increase air flow. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air The selected air flow is shown on the display of control: a sensor detects pollutants in the the automatic climate control. outside air and shuts off automatically. The air flow of the automatic climate control ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the may be reduced automatically to save battery supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ power. manently blocked. Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ Rear window defroster cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window Press button. fogging. The rear window defroster switches If the windows are fogged over, switch off the off automatically after a certain period of time. recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 135
Climate control Controls
Defrosts windows and removes Ventilation condensation Press button. Front ventilation Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ moved from the windshield and the front side windows. For this purpose, point the side vents onto the side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, sor. arrow 1. ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the Switching the system on/off vents continuously, arrows 2. ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature in Switch off the upper body region, arrow 3. Press the left button for the minimum Toward blue: colder. speed. Toward red: warmer. The set interior temperature for the driver Switching on and passenger are not changed. Press any button except ▷ Rear window defroster. Adjusting the ventilation ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Ventilation for cooling: Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's interior is too hot. In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, ▷ Draft-free ventilation: pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 191, of your vehi‐ cle.
135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 136
Controls Climate control
Ventilation in the rear Preselecting the reel-on time On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time.
Activating the reel-on time On the Control Display: ▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 1. 1. "Settings" ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ 2. "Climate" row 2. 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2" Toward blue: colder. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ Toward red: warmer. trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐ vated. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 3. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the Parked-car ventilation next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ vated. The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ cle interior and lowers its temperature, if needed. The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by us‐ ing two preset reel-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly On the Control Display:
1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comf. ventilation" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes if the system is switched on.
136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 137
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Compatibility This chapter describes all standard, country- If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ specific and optional features offered with the ing or in the instructions of the system series. It also describes features that are not to be controlled, the system is gener‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ally compatible with the universal garage door the selected options or country versions. This opener. also applies to safety-related functions and If you have any questions, please contact: systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Your service center. provisions must be observed when using the ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. respective features and systems. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. Universal Integrated Remote Control Control elements on the interior rearview mirror The concept The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐ tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener re‐ places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ med with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required ▷ LED, arrow 1. in order to program the remote control. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. During programming ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ During programming and before activat‐ quired for programming. ing a device using the universal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐ mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐ Programming trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury or damage. General information Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- 1. Switch on the ignition. held transmitter.◀ 2. Initial setup: Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored Press and hold the left and right button on functions for the sake of security. the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 138
Controls Interior equipment
erases all programming of the buttons on rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then the interior rearview mirror. stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ features an alternating-code system. Flashing tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior peat for approximately 20 seconds. rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ For systems with an alternating-code system, pends on the manual transmitter. the universal garage door opener and the sys‐ 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button tem also have to be synchronized. of the desired function on the hand-held Please read the operating manual to find out transmitter and the button to be program‐ how to synchronize the system. med on the interior rearview mirror. The Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ ond person. gin flashing slowly. To synchronize: 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system. rior rearview mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior If the LED does not flash faster after at rearview mirror as described. least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button tween the interior rearview mirror and the on the system being programmed. You hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. Several more attempts at different distan‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the ces may be necessary. Wait at least interior rearview mirror for approximately 15 seconds between attempts. 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, Canada: if programming with the hand- repeat this step up to three times in order held transmitter was interrupted, hold to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐ down the interior rearview mirror button zation is complete, the programmed func‐ and repeatedly press and release the tion will be carried out. hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Reprogramming individual buttons 6. To program other functions on other but‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ button to be programmed. rior rearview mirror buttons. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held Special feature of the alternating- transmitter for the system to be controlled code wireless system approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the If you are unable to operate the system after buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The repeated programming, please check if the required distance depends on the manual system to be controlled features an alternat‐ transmitter. ing-code system. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐ view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 139
Interior equipment Controls
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that Digital compass the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can Overview then be controlled by the button on the in‐ terior rearview mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button 1 Control button and repeatedly press and release the 2 Mirror display hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Mirror display Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the Before operation mirror when driving straight. Before operating a system using the uni‐ Operating concept versal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the Various functions can be called up by pressing range of movement of the remote-controlled the control button with a pointed object, such system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. damage. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the con‐ Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- trol button is pressed: held transmitter.◀ ▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. The system, such as the garage door, can be ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. operated using the button on the interior rear‐ view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering the button within receiving range of the system setting. until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted. Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ Deleting stored functions cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ Press and hold the left and right button on the fer to World map with compass zones. interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 140
Controls Interior equipment
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to 2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle. trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears mirror. on the display. Next, drive in a complete The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ circle at least once at a speed of no more pass is ready for use again after approximately than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ 10 seconds. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass. Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or ▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory. ▷ The point of the compass displayed does Setting the language not change despite changing the direction of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control ▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ button again to reel between English "E" and played. German "O".
140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 141
Interior equipment Controls
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ Replace the cover after use mately 10 seconds. Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Sun visor
Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.
The cigarette lighter is located in the center Ashtray/cigarette lighter console. Push in the lighter. Ashtray The lighter can be removed as Opening soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical devices
Hints Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Raise cover. Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as Emptying this may damage the vehicle battery due to an Take out the insert. increased power consumption.◀
Lighter Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after Danger of burns use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ erwise, there is a danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀
141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 142
Controls Interior equipment
Sockets In the trunk
General information The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on.
Note The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable The socket is located on the left side in the connectors. trunk.
Front center console USB interface for data transfer
The concept Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35. ▷ Music collection. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. ▷ Importing Trips.
Rear center console Hints Observe the following when connecting: ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐ ing external devices.
Remove the cover.
142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 143
Interior equipment Controls
Without telephone: overview Hints Danger of jamming Before folding down the rear seat back‐ rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐ jury or damage may result.◀
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐ Ensuring the stability of the child seat partment. When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and With telephone: overview headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ rest.◀
Retract the head restraint if needed be‐ fore backrest is folded down
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ With folding head restraints, fold in the head rest. restraints before folding down the rear seat backrests, or damage may result.◀
Opening Through-loading system 1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo The concept area to release the rear seat backrest. The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. If equipped with through-loading system: the rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20– 40. The sides can be folded down separately or to‐ gether.
143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 144
Controls Interior equipment
2. The unlocked backrest moves forward slightly.
3. Fold backrest forward.
Closing Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it. Ensure that the lock is securely engaged Make sure that the lock engages prop‐ erly when folding back, otherwise transported cargo could enter the car's interior during brak‐ ing or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle's occupants.◀ To secure cargo, refer to page 156, with nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing eyes.
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull the middle sec‐ tion forward.
144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 145
Storage compartments Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment in the front center armrest, refer to page 146. This chapter describes all standard, country- ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to console, refer to page 147. the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Storage compartment between the rear also applies to safety-related functions and seats, refer to page 147. systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Glove compartment
Front passenger side Hints Note No loose objects in the car's interior Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐ Close the glove compartment again im‐ rior without securing them; otherwise, they mediately may present a danger to occupants e.g., during Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ braking and evasive maneuvers.◀ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ board Opening Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀
Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 145. Pull the handle. ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, The light in the glove compartment switches refer to page 146. on. ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to page 146. Closing ▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage Fold cover closed. compartment, in front of the cupholders, refer to page 146.
145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 146
Controls Storage compartments
Locking Front storage compartment The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 41, e.g. This prevents access to the glove compart‐ ment and to the trunk. After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side A storage compartment is located in the center armrest in front of the cup holders. Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Center armrest Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ Front cur during accidents.◀ A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats. Opening Opening
Pull the handle. Fold the center armrest up. Closing Fold cover closed. Repositioning Center armrest can be pushed forwards or backwards. It engages in the end positions. Compartments in the doors Connection for an external audio Do not stow any breakable objects device Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. An external audio device, e.g., glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an MP3 player, can be con‐ an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐ nected via the AUX-IN port or cident.◀
146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 147
Storage compartments Controls
the USB audio interface in the center armrest.
Storage compartment in the rear A storage compartment is located in the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. Storage compartment To open: press the button. between the rear seats To close: push both covers back in, one after the other. There is a storage compartment between the rear seats. Pushing back the covers Push back the covers before folding up Cupholders the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could become damaged.◀ Hints Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Clothes hooks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do Do not obstruct view not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is When suspending clothing from the the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's view.◀ Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ No heavy objects tainers into the cupholders. This may result in Do not hang heavy objects from the damage.◀ hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ Front neuvers.◀ The clothes hooks are located in the rear.
Storage compartments in the trunk
Storage compartment A storage compartment is located on the left side. Rear Located on the right side is a storage compart‐ ment for the first aid kit, refer to page 203. In the center armrest.
147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 148
Controls Storage compartments
Net for storage compartment Smaller objects can be stored in the net of right storage compartment.
Multi-function hook Lightweight objects only Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐ ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.◀
A multi-function hook is located on each side of the trunk. The multi-function hooks can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.
Lashing eyes in the trunk To secure the cargo, refer to page 156, there are two or four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net The floor net can also be used to secure the cargo, refer to page 156, and store small parts.
148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 149
Storage compartments Controls
149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 152
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. This chapter describes all standard, country- Drive conservatively for the first specific and optional features offered with the 200 miles/300 km. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Brake system the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ systems. The respectively applicable country prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐ provisions must be observed when using the formance between brake discs and brake respective features and systems. pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐ riod.
Breaking-in period Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal General information level only after a distance driven of approx. Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, other (break-in time). engage the clutch gently. The following instructions will help accomplish Following part replacement a long vehicle life and good efficiency. The same break-in procedures should be ob‐ During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐ served if any of the components above-men‐ trol, refer to page 74. tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km General driving notes Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: Closing the trunk lid ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and Drive with the trunk lid closed 100 mph/160 km/h. Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ wise, in the event of an accident or braking and stances. evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐ fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be From 1,200 miles/2,000 km damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be ter the vehicle interior.◀ increased. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be Tires avoided: Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. ▷ Drive moderately.
152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 153
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Hot exhaust system Driving through water Hot exhaust system Observe water level and speed High temperatures are generated in the Do not exceed the maximum water level exhaust system. and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's Do not remove the heat shields installed and engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐ never apply undercoating to them. Make sure mission may be damaged.◀ that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, Drive though calm water only and only if it is grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐ height, no faster than walking speed, up to sition mode, or when parked. Such contact 3 mph/5 km/h. could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐ Braking safely erty damage. Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, ard feature. there is a danger of getting burned.◀ Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed. Mobile communication devices in the Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid vehicle any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ fort. hicle Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from It is not recommended to use mobile phones, the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior active mode. without a direct connection to an external aer‐ In certain braking situations, the perforated ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and brake discs can cause functional problems. mobile communication devices can interfere However, this has no effect on the perform‐ with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake. ance that the radiation generated during trans‐ mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐ Objects within the range of movement cle interior.◀ of the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Hydroplaning Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other Hydroplaning objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ function of the pedals could be impeded while duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ driving and create the risk of an accident. On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can Do not place additional floor mats over existing form between the tires and road surface. mats or other objects. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ Only use floor mats that have been approved ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete for the vehicle and can be properly attached to loss of contact between the tires and the road floor. surface, ultimately undermining your ability to Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ steer and brake the vehicle. tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀
153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 154
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Driving in wet conditions Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐ press brake pedal ever so gently every few sponse - generally that cannot be corrected. miles. Condensation under the parked Ensure that this action does not endanger vehicle other traffic. When using the automatic climate control, The heat generated in this process helps dry condensation water develops collecting under‐ the brake discs and pads. neath the vehicle. In this way braking efficiency will be available These traces of water under the vehicle are when you need it. normal. Hills Avoid stressing the brakes Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐ available with the engine stopped.◀ Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐ wise the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.
Brake disc corrosion Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the brake pads are favored by: ▷ Low mileage. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during braking is not reached - thus discs don't get cleaned.
154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 155
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle features and options vehicle and unstable driving situations may result. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.
2. Determine the combined weight of the Hints driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Overloading the vehicle 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐ and passengers from XXX kilograms or pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. YYY pounds. Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available side the tires. This could result in a sudden amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals No fluids in the cargo area 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs Make sure that fluids do not leak into the passengers in your vehicle, the amount of cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity aged.◀ is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs. Heavy and hard objects 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ Do not stow any heavy and hard objects gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ calculated in Step 4. vers.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 156
Driving tips Loading
Load Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the trunk
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the To secure the cargo there are two or four lash‐ less cargo that can be transported. ing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net Stowing cargo The floor net can also be used to secure cargo and store small parts. ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the trunk ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of floor. the backrests. Securing cargo Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described; otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀ ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps. Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.
156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 157
Loading Driving tips
Roof-mounted luggage rack ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the trunk lid. Note ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ Roof racks are available as special accessories. ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently. Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. Fold the cover outward.
Loading Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐ fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not extend past the loading area. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps.
157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 158
Driving tips Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass This chapter describes all standard, country- sunroof specific and optional features offered with the Driving with the glass sunroof and windows series. It also describes features that are not open results in increased air resistance and necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to thereby reduces the range. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country Tires provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. General information Tires can affect fuel consumption in various General information ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐ sumption. Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ Check the tire inflation pressure sions. regularly Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ starting on a long trip. erate driving style and regular maintenance, Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and ronmental impact. tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away immediately Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. Remove attached parts This is the quickest way of warming the cold following use engine up to operating temperature. Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following Look well ahead when use. driving Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.
158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 159
Saving fuel Driving tips
Avoid high engine speeds road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ Switch off any functions that ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When are not currently needed accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ gine speeds. Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and When you reach the desired speed, shift into reduce the range, especially in city and stop- the highest applicable gear and drive with the and-go traffic. engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ stant speed. Reel off these functions if they are not needed. If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of The ECO PRO driving program supports the the vehicle, refer to page 83. energy conserving use of comfort features. These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely. Use coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot Have maintenance carried off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. out For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve erator and let the vehicle roll. optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life. The maintenance should be carried out by The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. your service center. Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer Switch off the engine during to page 191. longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., ECO PRO at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves Auto Start/Stop function on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐ automatically switches off the engine during a mate control output, are adjusted. stop. Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐ If the engine is switched off and then restarted matically decoupled from the transmission in rather than leaving the engine running con‐ the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐ reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position onds of switching off the engine. D remains engaged. In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ In addition, context-sensitive instructions are mined by other factors, such as driving style, displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ sumption driving style.
159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 160
Driving tips Saving fuel
The achieved extended range is displayed in ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": the instrument cluster as bonus range. The output is reduced once the set ECO PRO speed is reached. Overview The system includes the following Coasting EfficientDynamics functions and displays: Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 160. ing the engine and Coasting, refer to ▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to page 162, with the engine idling. page 161 This function is only available in ECO PRO ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to mode. page 160. ECO PRO climate control ▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to page 162. "ECO PRO climate control" ▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. page 163. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or Activate ECO PRO cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption can be economized. Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument The mirror heating is made available when out‐ cluster. side temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO potential Configuring ECO PRO Shows potential savings with the current set‐ Via the Driving Dynamics Control tings in percentages. 1. Activate ECO PRO. Display in the instrument cluster 2. "Configure ECO PRO" 3. Configure the program. ECO PRO bonus range An adjusted driving style helps Via the iDrive you extend your driving range. 1. "Settings" This may be displayed as the 2. "ECO PRO mode" bonus range in the instrument Or cluster. The bonus range is shown in the range display. 1. "Settings" The bonus range is automatically reset every 2. "Driving mode" time the vehicle is refueled. 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip ▷ "Tip at:": Adjust the ECO PRO speed.
160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 161
Saving fuel Driving tips
Efficiency display ECO PRO tip, driving tip
Display in the instrument cluster The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance.
Note The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
Display in the instrument cluster with extended 1. "Settings" range 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "ECO PRO Info"
ECO PRO tip, symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed. Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐ celerator or delay accelerating to al‐ low time to assess road conditions. A mark in the efficiency display informs about the current driving style. Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed. Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ ergy recovered by coasting or when braking. Steptronic transmission: shift from Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐ M/S to D. celerating. Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the Steptronic transmission/manual bar's color: transmission: follow shifting instruc‐ ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long tions. as the mark moves within the blue range. Manual transmission: engage neu‐ ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by tral for engine stop. backing off the accelerator pedal. The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving are met.
161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 162
Driving tips Saving fuel
Indications on the Control Display Coasting
EfficientDynamics The concept Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ The system helps to conserve fuel. ogy can be displayed while driving. To do this, under certain conditions the engine 1. "Vehicle info" is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ sion when selector lever position D is set. The 2. "EfficientDynamics" vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector Displaying fuel consumption history lever position D remains engaged. The average fuel consumption can be dis‐ This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ played within an adjustable time frame. ing. Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐ lected time frame. tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled Trip interruptions are represented below the again. bar on the time axis. "Consumption history" Hints Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ Adjusting fuel consumption history fer to page 159, driving mode. time frame Coasting is automatically activated when ECO Select the symbol. PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control. Resetting fuel consumption history The function is available in a certain speed 1. Open "Options". range. 2. "Reset consumption history" A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and sup‐ Displaying EfficientDynamics info ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting. The current efficiency can be displayed. "EfficientDynamics info" Safety mode The following systems are displayed: The function is not available under one of the following conditions. ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. ▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on ▷ Climate control output. steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ Coasting. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐ Display ECO PRO tips sive current. "ECO PRO Tips" ▷ Cruise control activated. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 163
Saving fuel Driving tips
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if Indications on the Control Display the following conditions are met: The Coasting driving condition is displayed in ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode operated. is active. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ The distance traveled in the Coasting driving tion D. condition is indicated by a counter. ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. The driving status Coast can be influenced with the shift paddles.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. "EfficientDynamics info" The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ Deactivating the system manually ometer approximately indicates idle speed. The function can be deactivated in the Config‐ The coasting point indicator is illuminated at ure ECO PRO, refer to page 160, menu, e.g., to the zero point during coasting. use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐ eling downhill. Display in the instrument cluster with Settings are stored for the profile currently in extended range use. The mark in the efficiency dis‐ play below the tachometer is ECO PRO driving style analysis backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tachometer The concept approximately indicates idle In this situation the system helps develop an speed. especially efficient driving style and to con‐ The coasting point indicator is illuminated at serve fuel. the zero point during coasting. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. Using this indication, the individual driving style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 164
Driving tips Saving fuel
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. Tips about the energy saving driving style, The range of the vehicle can be extended by Conserving fuel, refer to page 158. an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display.
Functional requirement The function is only available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. Select the symbol.
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐ ysis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ ing style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐ row 1. The table of values contains stars. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, arrow 2. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving.
164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 165
Saving fuel Driving tips
165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 168
Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Hints Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to page 170, prior to refueling. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀
Fuel lid Closing 1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you Opening clearly hear a click. 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler 2. Close the fuel filler flap. flap. Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g. The release is located in the trunk.
168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 169
Refueling Mobility
Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀
169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 170
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: This chapter describes all standard, country- US: ASTM 4806–xx specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to xx: comply with the current standard in each the selected options or country versions. This case. also applies to safety-related functions and Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐ systems. The respectively applicable country age of ethanol provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐ centage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise Fuel recommendation this could damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀ Note Recommended fuel grade General fuel quality BMW recommends AKI 91. Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ Minimum fuel grade gine problems, for instance poor engine start- up behavior, poor handling and/or poor BMW recommends AKI 89. performance. Switch gas stations or use a Minimum fuel grade brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀ Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ Gasoline formance.◀ For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds tent. when starting at high outside temperatures. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ This has no effect on the engine life. taining metal must not be used. Fuel quality Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result out metallic additives. in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ iron, as this can cause permanent damage to ronmental conditions such as high ambient the catalytic converter and other compo‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur. nents.◀ If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ommend switching to a high quality gasoline 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 171
Fuel Mobility
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ tenance.◀
171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 172
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more This chapter describes all standard, country- than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has specific and optional features offered with the been parked for at least 2 hours. series. It also describes features that are not The displays of inflation devices may under- necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to read by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire systems. The respectively applicable country inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire provisions must be observed when using the Monitor. respective features and systems. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure specifications Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ page 173, contains all tire inflation pressure sure influence the following: specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ▷ The service life of the tires. ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and ▷ Road safety. recommended tire brands. This information ▷ Driving comfort. can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, Checking the tire inflation pressure please note the following: Check the tire inflation pressure regularly ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ Tire inflation pressures up to serve this precaution, you may be driving on 100 mph/160 km/h tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for that may not only compromise your vehicle's optimum driving comfort, note the pressure driving stability, but also lead to tire damage values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer and the risk of an accident.◀ to page 173, and adjust as necessary. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐ flation pressure. Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases along with the tire's temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐ fications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature.
172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 173
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 2.2 / 32 - R 17 91 W RSC - 2.3 / 33 Rear: 245/40 R 17 91 W RSC
Front: 225/40 2.2 / 32 - R 18 88 Y RSC These pressure values can also be found on - 2.6 / 38 the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's Rear: 245/35 door pillar. R 18 88 Y RSC Front: 225/35 2.5 / 36 - Maximum permissible speed R 19 88 Y XL - 2,9/ 42 Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ RSC wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ Rear: 245/30 R 19 89 Y XL Tire inflation pressure values up to RSC 100 mph/160 km/h Front: 225/40 R 2.2 / 32 - 228i, 228i xDrive 18 88 Y Std - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 245/35 R Tire size Pressure specifications in 18 92 Y XL Std bar/PSI Emergency Speed up to a max. of Specifications in wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h bar/PSI with cold T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60 tires M
225/45 R 17 91 H 2.2 / 32 2.3 / 33 M235i, M235i xDrive M+S RSC Tire size Pressure specifications in 205/50 R 17 89 2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36 bar/PSI V M+S A/S RSC Specifications in 205/50 R 17 89 H bar/PSI with cold M+S RSC tires 225/40 R 18 92 V 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 M+S XL A/S RSC 205/50 R 17 89 H 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 225/40 R 18 92 V M+S RSC M+S XL RSC 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 174
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifications in Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI bar/PSI
225/40 R 18 92 V 2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38 Specifications in M+S XL A/S RSC bar/PSI with cold 225/40 R 18 92 V tires M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 - 225/45 R 17 91 H 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 18 88 Y Std - 2.6 / 38 M+S RSC Rear: 245/35 R 205/50 R 17 89 2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41 18 92 Y XL Std V M+S A/S RSC Front: 225/40 2.3 / 33 - 225/40 R 18 92 V R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 M+S XL A/S RSC Rear: 245/35 205/50 R 17 89 H R 18 88 Y RSC M+S RSC
Front: 225/35 2.6 / 38 - 225/40 R 18 92 V M+S XL RSC R 19 88 Y XL - 2.9 /42 RSC Front: 225/45 2.2 / 32 - Rear: 245/30 R 17 91 W RSC - 2.5 / 36 R 19 89 Y XL Rear: 245/40 R 17 RSC 91 W RSC
Emergency Speed up to a max. of Front: 225/40 2.2 / 32 - wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60 Rear: 245/35 R 18 M 88 Y RSC
Front: 225/35 2.5 / 36 - Tire inflation pressures at max. R 19 88 Y XL RSC speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h - 2.9 /42 Rear: 245/30 R 19 Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 89 Y XL RSC In order to drive at maximum speeds in Front: 225/40 R 2.2 / 32 - excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, 18 88 Y Std and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for - 2.6 / 38 speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the Rear: 245/35 R 18 relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ 92 Y XL Std wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ Emergency Speed up to a max. of wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h Tire inflation pressure values over T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60 100 mph/160 km/h M 228i, 228i xDrive With high-speed tuning feature Without high-speed tuning feature
174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 175
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications in Tire size Pressure specifications bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold tires tires
225/45 R 17 91 2.5 / 36 2.9 /42 225/40 R 18 92 V 2.5 / 36 2.8 / 41 H M+S RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
205/50 R 17 89 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 205/50 R 17 89 H H M+S RSC M+S RSC 225/45 R 17 91 H 225/40 R 18 92 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 M+S RSC V M+S XL RSC 225/40 R 18 92 V Front: 225/45 2.5 / 36 - M+S XL RSC R 17 91 W RSC - 3.0 / 44 Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 - Rear: 245/40 18 88 Y Std R 17 91 W RSC - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 245/35 R 18 Front: 225/40 2.4 / 35 - 92 Y XL Std R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.9 /42 Front: 225/40 2.3 / 33 - Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 245/35 R 18 Front: 225/35 2.8 / 41 - 88 Y RSC R 19 88 Y XL - 3.2 / 46 RSC Front: 225/35 2.6 / 38 - R 19 88 Y XL RSC Rear: 245/30 - 2.9 /42 R 19 89 Y XL Rear: 245/30 R 19 RSC 89 Y XL RSC
Front: 225/40 R 2.4 / 35 - Emergency Speed up to a max. of wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h 18 88 Y Std - 2.9 /42 Rear: 245/35 R T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60 18 92 Y XL Std M
Emergency Speed up to a max. of With high-speed tuning feature wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h T 125/80 R 17 4.2 / 60 99 M
M235i, M235i xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature
175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 176
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifications in 18: rim diameter in inches bar/PSI 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Specifications in Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires bar/PSI with cold tires Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h 205/50 R 17 89 2.7 / 39 3.1 / 45 H M+S RSC S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h 225/45 R 17 91 T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H M+S RSC H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
225/40 R 18 92 2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46 V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h V M+S XL RSC W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h Front: 225/40 R 2.5 / 36 - 18 88 Y Std - 2.9 /42 Tire Identification Number Rear: 245/35 R DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115 18 92 Y XL Std xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Front: 225/40 2.5 / 36 - xxx: tire size and tire design R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.9 /42 0115: tire age Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Front: 225/35 2.9 /42 - R 19 88 Y XL - 3.2 / 46 Tire age RSC DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the Rear: 245/30 1st week of 2015. R 19 89 Y XL RSC Recommendation Emergency Speed up to a max. of Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h least every 6 years. T 125/80 R 17 4.2 / 60 99 M Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Tire identification marks For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tire size Temperature A 245/45 R 18 96 Y DOT Quality Grades 245: nominal width in mm Treadwear 45: aspect ratio in % Traction AA A B C R: radial tire code
176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 177
Wheels and tires Mobility
Temperature A B C A represent higher levels of performance on All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these quired by law. grades. Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ Treadwear tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and The treadwear grade is a comparative rating not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tion, or excessive loading, either separately or under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ in combination, can cause heat buildup and ernment test course. For example, a tire possible tire failure. graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of RSC – Run-flat tires their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 180, are labeled cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ with a circular symbol containing the letters ing habits, service practices and differences in RSC marked on the sidewall. road characteristics and climate. M+S Traction Winter and all-season tires with better cold The traction grades, from highest to lowest, weather performance than summer tires. are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under Tire tread controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Summer tires marked C may have poor traction performance. Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than The traction grade assigned to this tire is 0.12 in/3 mm. based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if and does not include acceleration, cornering, the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Winter tires Temperature Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, 0.16 in/4 mm. and C, representing the tire's resistance to the Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are generation of heat and its ability to dissipate less suitable for winter operation. heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 178
Mobility Wheels and tires
Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the rims and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐ ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐ come life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other traffic.◀ Wear indicators are distributed around the Repair of tire damage tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have They are marked on the side of the tire with damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ Tire damage Changing wheels and tires General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Mounting objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Information on mounting tires Hints Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles If work is not carried out properly, there is a can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and danger of subsequent damage and related suspension parts. This is more likely to occur safety hazards.◀ with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ ioning between the wheel and the road. Be Wheel and tire combination careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your You can ask the service center about the right speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions with low-profile tires. for the vehicle. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair fects: the function of a variety of systems such as ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving. ABS or DSC. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ dency to pull to the left or right. sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over figuration from a single manufacturer. curbs, road damage, or similar things. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 179
Wheels and tires Mobility
Approved wheels and tires Retreaded tires You should only use wheels and tires Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g., limit service life and have a negative impact on despite having the same official size ratings, road safety.◀ variations can lead to chassis contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ Winter tires are recommended for operating on uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ winter roads. mine if they are suited for use, and therefore Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐ cannot guarantee the operating safety of the vide better winter traction than summer tires, vehicle.◀ they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires. Recommended tire brands Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐ For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ age and accidents can occur.◀ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. Run-flat tires With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the New tires case of a flat tire. Your service center will be Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ glad to advise you. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a Rotating wheels between axles break-in time. Different wear patterns can occur on the front Drive conservatively for the first and rear axles depending on individual driving 200 miles/300 km. conditions. The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Your service Retreaded tires center will be glad to advise you. After rotating, The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ check the tire pressure and correct if needed. ommend the use of retreaded tires. Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐ cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 180
Mobility Wheels and tires
Storage into the tires, which seals the damage from the Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with inside. as little exposure to light as possible. The compressor can be used to check the tire Always protect tires against all contact with oil, inflation pressure. grease and fuels. Hints Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ lity System found on the compressor and sealant container. Run-flat tires ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. Label 1/8 in/4 mm or more. ▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable. ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the RSC label on the tire sidewall. electronics checked at the next opportu‐ The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ nity and have them replaced if needed. porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ Enclosed areas cial rims. Do not let the engine run in enclosed The support of the sidewall allows the tire to areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may remain drivable to a restricted degree in the lead to loss of consciousness and death. The event of a tire inflation pressure loss. exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire. Storage Changing run-flat tires The Mobility System is located under the For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No cargo floor panel. spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Mobility System
The concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 181
Wheels and tires Mobility
Sealing container Filling the tire with sealant 1. Shake the sealing container.
▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. 2. Take the connection hose completely out Observe use-by date on the sealant container. of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose. Compressor
3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐ 1 On/off reel tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it engages audibly. 2 Holder for bottle 3 Reduce inflation pressure 4 Inflation pressure dial 5 Compressor 6 Connector/cable for socket 7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom of the compressor
181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 182
Mobility Wheels and tires
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ running, reel on the compressor. ing that it engages audibly.
Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐ 5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire nutes valve of the defective wheel. Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.◀ Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐ nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at this point. 6. With the compressor switched off, insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ reached: hicle. 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel. 3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ tribute the sealant in the tire. 4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your service center.
Stowing the Mobility System 1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐ ant container from the wheel. 2. Remove the connection hose from the sealant container.
182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 183
Wheels and tires Mobility
3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ 4. Insert the connector into a power socket nection hose in suitable material to avoid inside the vehicle. dirtying the cargo area. 4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ cle.
Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 12 mph/20 km/h. 2.5 bar. ▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition To correct the tire inflation pressure turned on or the engine running, reel 1. Stop at a suitable location. on the compressor. 2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ valve stem. ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐ tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐ ble. 3. Attach the connection hose directly to the compressor. Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved. Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center.
Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: ▷ 205/55 R 16.
183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 184
Mobility Wheels and tires
▷ 205/50 R 17. ▷ 225/45 R 17. Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 185
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck 2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir 3 Washer fluid reservoir The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite side of the engine compartment. 5 Engine compartment fuse box
185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 186
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood Indicator/warning lights When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control Hints message is displayed. Working in the engine compartment Closing the hood Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the Hood open when driving necessary professional technical training. If you see any signs that the hood is not If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed mediately and close it securely.◀ only by a service center. Danger of jamming If work is not carried out properly, there is a Make sure that the closing path of the danger of subsequent damage and related hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐ ment Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀
Fold down wiper arm Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 may result in damage.◀ in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
Opening the hood The hood must audibly engage on both sides. 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.
186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 187
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Requirements series. It also describes features that are not A current measured value is available after ap‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter the selected options or country versions. This trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip also applies to safety-related functions and is displayed. systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the With frequent short-distance trips, regularly respective features and systems. perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level General information 1. "Vehicle info" The engine oil consumption is dependent on 2. "Vehicle status" the driving style and driving conditions. 3. "Engine oil level" The engine oil consumption can increase in case of, for example: Engine oil level display messages ▷ Sporty driving. Different messages appear on the display de‐ pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention ▷ Break-in the engine. to these messages. ▷ Idling of the engine. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next ▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades. 125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level page 188. after refueling. Engine oil level too low The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil Add engine oil immediately; otherwise, measurement. an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐ The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ sult in engine damage.◀ uring principles: Take care not to add too much engine oil. ▷ Status display Too much engine oil ▷ Detailed measurement Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐ Electronic oil measurement gine damage.◀
Status display Detailed measurement
The concept The concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically In the detailed measurement the engine oil while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐ level is checked and displayed via a scale. play.
187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 188
Mobility Engine oil
Gasoline engine: Oil filler neck If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. Diesel engine: During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat.
General information A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines. Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ Requirements played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message dis‐ ▷ Vehicle is on level road. played in the instrument cluster. ▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not Adding engine oil depressed. Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ tor pedal not depressed. Do not add too much engine oil ▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ When too much engine oil is added, im‐ perature. mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ Performing a detailed measurement Protect children In order to perform a detailed measurement of Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ the engine oil level: dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐ 1. "Vehicle info" ers to prevent health risks.◀ 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Measure engine oil level" 4. "Start measurement" Engine oil types to add The engine oil level is checked and displayed Hints via a scale. No oil additives Time: approx. 1 minute. Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐ age.◀
Adding engine oil Viscosity grades for engine oils General information When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, cle before engine oil is added. and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀
188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 189
Engine oil Mobility
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.
Suitable engine oil types You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐ ing oil rating standards: Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Further information regarding the oil specifica‐ tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐ quired with the service center.
Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐ gine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Gasoline engine
API SM or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change: The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the service center change the motor oil.
189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 190
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options The marks are on the side of the coolant reservoir. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Symbol Meaning series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Maximum the selected options or country versions. This Minimum also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the Adding respective features and systems. 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess Hints pressure to dissipate, then open it. Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀ Coolant consists of water and additives. 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about the 4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click. suitable additives are available from the service The arrows on the coolant reservoir and center. the lid must point towards one another. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible. Coolant level
General information Disposal Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ Comply with the relevant environmen‐ ant reservoir is located on the right side or the tal protection regulations when dispos‐ left side of the engine compartment. ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tween the minimum and maximum marks.
190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 191
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is This chapter describes all standard, country- continuously stored in the remote control. specific and optional features offered with the Your service center will read out this data and series. It also describes features that are not suggest the right array of service procedures necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to for your vehicle. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ systems. The respectively applicable country mote control with which the vehicle was driven provisions must be observed when using the most recently. respective features and systems. Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count. The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a service center update the support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ time-dependent maintenance procedures, erational reliability of the vehicle. such as checking brake fluid and, if needed, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ In some cases scopes and intervals may vary activated-charcoal filter. according to the country-specific version. Re‐ placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ Service and Warranty rately. Additional information is available from the service center. Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Condition Based Service Canadian models CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty count the driving conditions of your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐ nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the Maintenance and repair should be performed amount of maintenance corresponding to your by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ user profile. ular maintenance procedures recorded in the Detailed information on service requirements, vehicle's Service and Warranty Information refer to page 82, can be displayed on the Con‐ Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty trol Display. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ nance.
191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 192
Mobility Maintenance
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis
Note Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work‐ shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions.
Emissions ▷ The warning lamp lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.
192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 193
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the Onboard vehicle tool kit catch. 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place. 6. Fold down the wipers. Folding down wipers before opening the hood Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.◀
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the cargo floor panel. Lamp and bulb replacement
Hints Wiper blade replacement Lights and bulbs Note Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ Do not fold down the wipers without tion to vehicle safety. wiper blades The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades that you entrust corresponding procedures to have not been installed; this may damage the the service center if you are unfamiliar those or windshield.◀ if they have not been described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement Replacing the wiper blades bulbs at the service center. 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to page 70, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 194
Mobility Replacing components
Danger of burns Headlight glass Only change bulbs when they are cool; Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ otherwise, there is a danger of getting ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When burned.◀ driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ Working on the lighting system light glass does not need to be changed. When working on the lighting system, If the headlights do not dim despite driving you should always reel off the lights affected to with the light switched on, increasing humidity prevent short circuits. forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the To avoid possible injury or equipment damage service center check this. when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Headlight setting The headlight adjustments can be affected by Do not perform work/bulb replacement changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐ on xenon headlights lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐ Have any work on the xenon lighting system, ice after a replacement. including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage Front lights, bulb replacement present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Halogen headlights Do not touch the bulbs Overview Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light 1 Daytime running lights/high beams/head‐ source. light flasher These light-emitting diodes, which are related 2 Parking lights to conventional lasers, are officially designated 3 Low beams as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. 4 Turn signal Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 195
Replacing components Mobility
Accessing the turn signals and low beams Low beams Follow general instructions, refer to page 193. 55-watt bulb, H7. 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ 1. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐ ets and remove the cover. move.
2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it Turn signal from the holder and remove. 21-watt bulb, PY21W 1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the connector off the bulb. 4. Attach the connector to the new bulb. 5. First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn arrow 2. The bulb must audibly latch in counterclockwise and remove. place. 3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
6. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages. 7. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 196
Mobility Replacing components
Accessing the daytime running lights, high Parking lights beams/headlight flasher and parking lights 6-watt bulb, H6W. Follow general instructions, refer to page 193. 1. Tilt the bulb holder down and then up to 1. Open the hood, refer to page 186. loosen it from the holder and remove it. 2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐ move.
2. Carefully remove the bulb from the bulb holder. 3. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse Daytime running lights and high beams/ order of removal. Make sure you hear the headlight flasher bulb holder engage. 55-watt bulb, H15. 4. Close the headlight housing with the lid. 1. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐ move. Xenon headlights
Hints Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lights on and off frequently shortens their life. If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Do not perform work/bulb replacement 2. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐ on xenon headlights moval. Turn the clockwise bulb here until it Have any work on the xenon lighting system, hits the stop. including bulb replacement, performed only by 3. Close the headlight housing with the lid. a service center. Due to the high voltage Make sure that the lid engages. present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.
196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 197
Replacing components Mobility
At a glance 21-watt bulb, PY21W 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ ets and remove the cover.
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher 3 Turn signal 2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. Xenon headlights Low beams and high beams are designed with xenon technology. The parking lights and daylight running lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Turn signal
Follow general instructions, refer to page 193. 3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Front fog lights Follow general instructions, refer to page 193. 35-watt bulb, H8.
1. Use the back side of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 198
Mobility Replacing components
Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐ Tail lights, bulb replacement row 2. Overview
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. Turn the bulb, arrow 2. 1 Turn signal Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. 2 Top brake lamp Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ 3 Reversing lamp wise. 4 Rear lamp Remove the bulb. 5 Bottom brake lights
Bulb replacement Follow general instructions, refer to page 193. Turn signal, brake, tail, rear or reversing lamp: 21-watt bulb, P21W Rear fog lamp: 6-watt bulb, H6W.
Removing the tail lamp
3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector 1. Open trunk lid. and screw on the wheel house panel. 2. Open the two covers on the tail lamp.
Turn signal in exterior mirror The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
3. With the handle of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, loosen and re‐ move the nuts on the two fasteners. Make sure that the nuts do not drop into the
198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 199
Replacing components Mobility
bumper area. In addition to the two outer 3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the fasteners, there is another inner fastener. new bulb and attach the bulb holder to the tail lamp. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.
Installing the tail lamp 1. Connect the plug to the bulb holder. 2. Insert the tail lamp straight in and press it in, arrow 1, until the rubber mount latches in the inner fastener. Make sure when in‐ serting the tail lamp that the rubber lip, ar‐ 4. Grasp the handle with one hand, arrow 1, row 2, on the top side of the tail lamp does and brace with the free hand on the out‐ not fold over. Screw on the two nuts, ar‐ side, arrow 2. Carefully pry out the tail row 3, and close covers. lamp, arrow 3, until the rubber mount re‐ leases from the inner fastener.
Central brake lamp and license plate lamp 5. Remove the plug from the bulb holder. Follow general instructions, refer to page 193. Replacing the bulbs These lights are made using LED technology. 1. Loosen the six fasteners on the tail lamp, Contact your service center in the event of a arrows 1, and remove the tail lamp from the malfunction. lamp holder, arrow 2. Changing wheels
Hints When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. Which is why no spare tire is available. The tools for changing wheels are available as 2. Press the defective bulb gently into the accessories from your service center. socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 200
Mobility Replacing components
Jacking points for the vehicle jack The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases: ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. ▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ riods, longer than a month.
Hints Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ cated at the positions shown. tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.◀ Vehicle battery Starting aid terminals Maintenance In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the The battery is maintenance-free. starting aid terminals, refer to page 204, in the The added amount of acid is sufficient for the engine compartment with the engine off. service life of the battery. Further information about the battery can be Power failure obtained from your service center. After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐ Battery replacement tings updated, e. g.: Use approved vehicle batteries only ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐ tions again. Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; ▷ Time: update. otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and ▷ Date: update. systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ ▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize ble.◀ the system, refer to page 47. After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by the service center Disposing of old batteries to ensure that all comfort features are fully Have old batteries disposed of by your available and that any Check Control mes‐ service center or bring them to a recy‐ sages of these comfort features are no longer cling center. displayed. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so Charging the battery that it does not tip over during transport. General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.
200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 201
Replacing components Mobility
Fuses 2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and then thread it between the bars. Hints Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box 3. Press down on the holder and tighten the in the trunk. three screws.
In the engine compartment In the trunk 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen the three cover screws, arrow 1.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
2. Squeeze and raise the holder, arrow 2. 3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3. 4. Press the four fasteners and remove the cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers 1. When attaching the cover, make sure that all four fasteners are engaged.
201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 202
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Hints This chapter describes all standard, country- Emergency Request not guaranteed specific and optional features offered with the For technical reasons, the Emergency series. It also describes features that are not Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to able conditions.◀ the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Overview systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
SOS button in the roofliner
Requirements ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. The button is located in the center console. ▷ The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ The Assist system is functional.
Intelligent Emergency Initiating an Emergency Request Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the The concept button lights up green. In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ ▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency quest can be made through this system. Request was initiated. If a cancel prompt appears on the display, General information the Emergency Request can be aborted. Only press the SOS button in an emergency. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been established.
202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 203
Breakdown assistance Mobility
When the emergency request is received First aid kit at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes Note further steps to help you. Some of the articles have a limited service life. Even if you are unable to respond, the Check the expiration dates of the contents BMW Response Center can take further regularly and replace any expired items steps to help you under certain circum‐ promptly. stances. For this, data are transmitted to the BMW Storage Response Center which serve to deter‐ mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g. the current position of the vehicle, if it can be established. ▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW Response Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request automatically The first aid kit is located in the trunk in the storage compartment. Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS Jump-starting button. General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be Warning triangle started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Hints Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐ jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.◀
The warning triangle is located on the inside of To prevent personal injury or damage to both the trunk lid. vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure. To remove, loosen the bracket.
203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 204
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Preparation Connecting the cables Bodywork contact between vehicles 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid terminal. Make sure that there is no contact be‐ tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ tance. mation can be found on the battery. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ of the cable to the positive terminal of the cle. battery, or to the corresponding starting 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. consumers in both vehicles. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of Starting aid terminals the battery, or to the corresponding engine Connecting order or body ground of assisting vehicle. Connect the jumper cables in the correct 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀ negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ started in the usual way. gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ If the first starting attempt is not success‐ tive terminal. ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ charged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ verse order. Check the battery and recharge if needed.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.
204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 205
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Tow-starting and towing Tow truck
Note With rear-wheel drive Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀
Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position. Your vehicle should be transported with a tow Towing truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Follow the towing instructions Do not lift the vehicle Follow all towing instructions; otherwise, vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀ Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; may result.◀ otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable. With xDrive ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn. ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering. ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ quired. ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, The vehicle should only be transported on a it will not be possible to control the vehi‐ loading platform. cle's response. Do not tow with only the front or rear axle raised Do not tow the BMW with just the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.◀
Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀
205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 206
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Steptronic transmission: transporting Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly your vehicle Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may Note cause damage.◀ Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ Therefore, contact a service center in the pending on local regulations. event of a breakdown. ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly Do not have the vehicle towed identify the vehicle being towed by placing Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ dow. cur.◀ Tow bar Tow truck The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.
The vehicle should only be transported on a Tow rope loading platform. When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. Do not lift the vehicle To avoid jerking and the associated stresses Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. may result.◀ Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐ Tow fitting sitioning the vehicle. The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ ried in the vehicle. Towing other vehicles The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. Hints Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ sponse.◀
206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 207
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 203. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐ alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐ gine is cold. 1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations. The tow fitting is located in the onboard vehi‐ 2. Ignition, refer to page 63, on. cle tool kit under the cargo floor panel. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the Tow fitting, information on use clutch pedal pressed and slowly release ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐ the vehicle and screw it all the way in. ately press on the clutch pedal again. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow roads only. bar or rope, and switch off the hazard ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., warning system. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. 6. Have the vehicle checked. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 208
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with high-pressure washers This chapter describes all standard, country- When using high-pressure washers, do not specific and optional features offered with the spray the sensors and camera lenses on the series. It also describes features that are not outside of the vehicle for long periods and necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀ the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country Automatic car washes provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Hints Do not use high pressure washing sys‐ tems Car washes With washing systems operating at high pres‐ sures and nozzle positions close to the win‐ General information dows, drops of water can penetrate.◀ Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or the hood is raised. those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not age the vehicle. damaged by the transport mechanisms. ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they Hints may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. Steam jets or high-pressure washers ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to When using steam jets or high-pressure page 69, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ washers, hold them a sufficient distance away vation. and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐ refer to page 45. sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may Guide rails in car washes then lead to long-term damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails higher Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body washer.◀ could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps:
208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 209
Care Mobility
Manual transmission: Headlights 1. Drive into the car wash. ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleansers. 2. Shift to neutral. ▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., 3. Switch the engine off. from insects, with shampoo and wash off 4. Switch on the ignition. with water. Steptronic transmission: ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an 1. Drive into the car wash. ice scraper. 2. Engage selector lever position N. After washing the vehicle 3. Switch the engine off. After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes In this way, the ignition remains switched briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ can be reduced and corrosion of the brake played. discs can occur. Do not turn off the ignition in the car Completely remove all residues on the win‐ wash dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; smearing and to reduce wiper noises and otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐ wiper blade wear. gaged and damages can result.◀ The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside Vehicle care when in selector lever position N. A signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the Car care products vehicle. BMW recommends using care and cleaning To start the engine with manual transmission: products from BMW, since these have been 1. Press on the clutch pedal. tested and approved. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Car care and cleaning products To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ Follow the instructions on the container. sion: When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. 1. Depress the brake pedal. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ 2. Press the Start/Stop button. cles. Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ Cleansers can contain substances that are ping on the brake turns the ignition off. dangerous and harmful to your health.◀ Selector lever position Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ Vehicle paint cally: Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in ▷ When the ignition is switched off. areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ quency and extent of your car care to these influences.
209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 210
Mobility Care
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ turer's instructions. tered or discolored. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent Leather care components, such as the brake disk. Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Chrome surfaces Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased tor grille or door handles with an ample supply wear and premature degradation of the leather of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ surface. ularly when they have been exposed to road To guard against discoloration, such as from salt. clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Rubber components Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Aside from water, treat only with rubber cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially cleansers. more visible. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and silicon-containing car care products in order to grease will gradually break down the protective avoid damage or noises. layer of the leather surface. Fine wood parts Suitable care products are available from the service center. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a Upholstery material care soft cloth. Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Plastic components If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage These include: stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using ▷ Roofliner. large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ▷ Lamp lenses. material vigorously. ▷ Instrument cluster cover. Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Matt black spray-coated components. Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Painted parts in the interior. other articles of clothing can damage the seat Clean with a microfiber cloth. covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ Dampen cloth lightly with water. Do not soak the roofliner. Caring for special components No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents Light-alloy wheels Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 211
Care Mobility
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead Displays/monitors to surface damage.◀ Cleaning displays and screens Do not use any chemical or household Safety belts cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐ Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and fected.◀ thus have a negative impact on safety. Keeping out moisture Chemical cleaning Keep all fluids and moisture away from Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the unit; otherwise, electrical components can the webbing.◀ be damaged.◀ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Avoid pressure Do not allow the reels to retract the safety Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning belts until they are dry. and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀ Carpets and floor mats Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. No objects in the area around the pedals Long-term Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the When the vehicle is shut down for longer than function of the pedals could be impeded while three months, special measures must be driving and create the risk of an accident. taken. Additional information is available from the service center. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ rior for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.
211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 214
Reference Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Note The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on informa‐ Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, from the service center. for example, due to the selected special equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents al‐ ment, country version or country-specific ways has priority. measurement method. Detailed values can be
Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐ measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
2 Series
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.1/1,984
Width without mirrors inches/mm 69.8/1,774
Height inches/mm 55.4/1,408– 55.8/1,418
Length inches/mm 174.7/4,437– 175.9/4,469
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.9/2,690
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.8/10.9–37.1/11.3
Weights The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with Step‐ cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐ tronic transmission.
214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 215
Technical data Reference
228i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,165/4,210–4,220 kg 1,889/1,910–1,914
Load lbs/kg 785/356
Approved front axle load lbs 1,985/1,985–1,995 kg 900/900–905 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,345/1,064
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 13.8/390
M235i powered by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,330/4,365 kg 1,964/1,980
Load lbs/kg 810/367
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,135/968
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,380/1,080
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 13.8/390
228i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,360–4,370 kg 1,978–1,982
Load lbs/kg 785/356
Approved front axle load lbs 2,050–2,100 kg 930–953
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,405/1,091
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 13.8/390
215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 216
Reference Technical data
M235i xperformanceed by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,490 kg 2,037
Load lbs/kg 785/356
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,245/1,018
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,380/1,080
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 13.8/390
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 13.7/52 Fuel quality, refer to page 170
216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 217
Technical data Reference
217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 218
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index A Alternating-code hand-held Average speed 86 transmitter 138 Axle loads, weights 214 ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ Alternative oil types 189 tem 112 Ambient light 94 B Acceleration Assistant, refer Antifreeze, washer fluid 70 to Launch Control 74 Antilock Brake System, Backrest curvature, refer to Accessories and parts 7 ABS 112 Lumbar support 50 Activated-charcoal filter 135 Anti-slip control, refer to Backrest, width 50 Adaptive brake lights, refer to DSC 112 Band-aids, refer to First aid Brake force display 111 Approved axle load 214 kit 203 Adaptive Light Control 91 Approved engine oils, see Bar for tow-starting/ Additives, oil 188 Suitable engine oil towing 206 Adjustments, seats/head re‐ types 189 Battery replacement, vehicle straints 48 Arrival time 86 battery 200 After washing vehicle 209 Ash tray 141 Battery replacement, vehicle Airbags 95 Assistance when driving remote control 35 Airbags, indicator/warning off 116 Battery, vehicle 200 light 96 Attentiveness assistant 111 Belts, safety belts 52 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ AUTO intensity 133 Beverage holder, cu‐ culated-air mode 131, 134 Automatic car wash 208 pholder 147 Air, dehumidifying, refer to Automatic climate con‐ BMW Assist, see user's Cooling function 131, 134 trol 130 manual for Navigation, En‐ Air distribution, Automatic climate control tertainment and Communi‐ manual 131, 134 with enhanced features 132 cation Air flow, air conditioner 131 Automatic Curb Monitor 56 BMW Driver’s Guide App 6 Air flow, automatic climate Automatic deactivation, front- BMW Homepage 6 control 134 seat passenger airbags 97 BMW Internet page 6 Air pressure, tires 172 Automatic headlight con‐ BMW maintenance sys‐ Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ trol 91 tem 191 tion 135 Automatic locking 43 Bonus range, ECO PRO 160 Alarm system 44 Automatic recirculated-air Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Alarm, unintentional 45 control 134 pholder 147 All around the center con‐ Automatic transmission, see Brake assistant 112 sole 16 Steptronic transmission 71 Brake discs, break-in 152 All around the roofliner 17 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ Brake force display 111 All around the steering mate control 133 Brake lights, adaptive 111 wheel 14 AUTO program, climate con‐ Brake lights, brake force dis‐ All-season tires, refer to Win‐ trol 131 play 111 ter tires 179 AUTO program, intensity 133 Brake pads, break-in 152 All-wheel-drive 113 Auto Start/Stop function 65 Braking, hints 153 Average fuel consumption 86 Breakdown assistance 202
218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 219
Everything from A to Z Reference
Break-in 152 Central screen, refer to Con‐ Compartments in the Brightness of Control Dis‐ trol Display 18 doors 146 play 88 Changes, technical, refer to Compass 139 Bulb replacement 193 Safety 7 Compressor 180 Bulb replacement, front 194 Changing parts 193 Condensation on win‐ Bulb replacement, rear 198 Changing wheels 199 dows 135 Bulbs and lights 193 Changing wheels/tires 178 Condensation under the vehi‐ Button, Start/Stop 63 Chassis number, see vehicle cle 154 Bypassing, refer to Jump- identification number 9 Condition Based Service starting 203 Check Control 77 CBS 191 Checking the oil level elec‐ Configuring driving pro‐ C tronically 187 gram 116 Children, seating position 59 Confirmation signal 43 California Proposition 65 Children, transporting ConnectedDrive, see user's Warning 7 safely 59 manual for Navigation, En‐ Camera lenses, care 211 Child restraint fixing sys‐ tertainment and Communi‐ Camera, rearview cam‐ tem 59 cation era 123 Child restraint fixing system ConnectedDrive Services Can holder, refer to Cu‐ LATCH 61 Connecting electrical devi‐ pholder 147 Child restraint fixing systems, ces 141 Car battery 200 mounting 59 Continued driving with a flat Car care products 209 Child seat, mounting 59 tire 100, 103 Care, displays 211 Child seats 59 Control Display 18 Care, vehicle 209 Chrome parts, care 210 Control Display, settings 87 Cargo 155 Cigarette lighter 141 Controller 18, 19 Cargo area, enlarging 143 Cleaning displays 211 Control systems, driving sta‐ Cargo area, storage compart‐ Climate control 130, 132 bility 112 ments 147 Clock 81 Convenient opening with the Cargo, securing 156 Closing/opening via door remote control 37 Cargo straps, securing lock 39 Coolant 190 cargo 156 Closing/opening with remote Coolant level 190 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ control 37 Coolant temperature 80 trol 34 Clothes hooks 147 Cooling function 131, 134 Carpet, care 211 Coasting 162 Cooling, maximum 133 Car wash 208 Coasting with engine decou‐ Cooling system 190 Catalytic converter, refer to pled, coasting 162 Cornering light 91 Hot exhaust system 153 Coasting with idling en‐ Corrosion on brake discs 154 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ gine 162 Cosmetic mirror 141 ice 191 Cockpit 14 Courtesy lamps during un‐ CD/Multimedia, see user's Combination reel, refer to locking 37 manual for Navigation, En‐ Turn signals 67 Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ tertainment and Communi‐ Combination switch, refer to cle locked 38 cation Wiper system 68 Cruise control 118 Center armrest 146 Comfort Access 41 Cruising range 81 Center console 16 COMFORT program, Dy‐ Cupholder 147 Central locking system 39 namic Driving Control 116 Current fuel consumption 81
219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 220
Reference Everything from A to Z
D Driver assistance, refer to In‐ Emergency release, fuel filler telligent Safety 103 flap 168 Damage, tires 178 Driving Assistant, refer to In‐ Emergency Request 202 Damping control, dy‐ telligent Safety 103 Emergency start function, en‐ namic 114 Driving Dynamics Con‐ gine start 35 Data, technical 214 trol 114 Emergency unlocking, trans‐ Date 81 Driving instructions, break- mission lock 74 Daytime running lights 91 in 152 Emergency unlocking, trunk Daytime running lights, bulb Driving mode 114 lid 41 replacement 196 Driving notes, general 152 Energy Control 81 Defrosting, refer to defrosting Driving stability control sys‐ Energy recovery 82 the windows 131 tems 112 Engine, automatic Start/Stop Defrosting, refer to Windows, Driving style analysis 163 function 65 defrosting 135 Driving tips 152 Engine, automatic switch- Defrosting the windows 131 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ off 65 Dehumidifying, air 131, 134 trol 112 Engine compartment 185 Deleting personal data 25 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Engine compartment, work‐ Deletion of personal data 25 trol 113 ing in 186 Destination distance 86 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine coolant 190 Digital clock 81 trol 114 Engine idling when driving, Digital compass 139 Dynamic Stability Control coasting 162 Dimensions 214 DSC 112 Engine oil 187 Dimmable exterior mirrors 57 Dynamic Traction Control Engine oil, adding 188 Dimmable interior rearview DTC 113 Engine oil additives 188 mirror 57 Engine oil change 189 Direction indicator, refer to E Engine oil filler neck 188 Turn signals 67 Engine oil types, alterna‐ Display, electronic, instru‐ ECO PRO 159 tive 189 ment cluster 76 ECO PRO, bonus range 160 Engine oil types, ap‐ Display lighting, refer to In‐ ECO PRO display 159 proved 189 strument lighting 93 ECO PRO driving mode 159 Engine start during malfunc‐ Displays, cleaning 211 ECO PRO driving style analy‐ tion 35 Disposal, coolant 190 sis 163 Engine start, jump-start‐ Disposal, vehicle battery 200 ECO PRO mode 159 ing 203 Distance control, refer to ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ Engine start, refer to Starting PDC 120 struction 161 the engine 64 Distance to destination 86 EfficientDynamics 162 Engine stop 64 Divided screen view, split Electronic displays, instru‐ Entering a car wash 208 screen 23 ment cluster 76 Equipment, interior 137 Door lock 39 Electronic oil measure‐ Error displays, see Check Door lock, refer to Remote ment 187 Control 77 control 34 Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Drive-off assistant 116 ESP, refer to DSC 112 gram, refer to DSC 112 Drive-off assistant, refer to Emergency detection, remote Exchanging wheels/tires 178 DSC 112 control 35 Exhaust system 153
220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 221
Everything from A to Z Reference
Exterior mirror, automatic Front lights 194 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ dimming feature 57 front-seat passenger airbags, ture 91 Exterior mirrors 55 automatic deactivation 97 Headlight flasher 68 External start 203 Front-seat passenger airbags, Headlight flasher, bulb re‐ External temperature dis‐ indicator lamp 97 placement 196 play 81 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 102 Headlight glass 194 External temperature warn‐ Fuel 170 Headlights 194 ing 81 Fuel consumption, refer to Headlights, care 209 Eyes for securing cargo 156 Average fuel consump‐ Headlight washer system 68 tion 86 Head restraints 48 F Fuel filler flap 168 Head restraints, front 53 Fuel gauge 80 Head restraints, rear 54 Failure message, see Check Fuel lid 168 Heavy cargo, stowing 156 Control 77 Fuel quality 170 High-beam Assistant 92 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuel recommendation 170 High beams 68 tional alarm 45 Fuel, tank capacity 216 High beams/low beams, refer Fan, refer to Air Fuse 201 to High-beam Assistant 92 flow 131, 134 High beams, bulb replace‐ Filler neck for engine oil 188 G ment 196 Fine wood, care 210 Hills 154 First aid kit 203 Garage door opener, refer to Hill start assistant, refer to Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ Universal Integrated Remote Drive-off assistant 116 ting 206 Control 137 Hints 6 Flat tire, changing Gasoline 170 Holder for beverages 147 wheels 199 Gear change, Steptronic Homepage 6 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 102 transmission 72 Hood 186 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gear shift indicator 83 Horn 14 tor TPM 98 General driving notes 152 Hotel function, trunk lid 41 Flat tire, warning Glare shield 141 Hot exhaust system 153 lamp 99, 102 Glass sunroof, powered 46 Hydroplaning 153 Flooding 153 Glove compartment 145 Floor carpet, care 211 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ I Floor mats, care 211 proved 214 Fogged up windows 131 Ice warning, see External Fold down the rear seat back‐ H temperature warning 81 rest, see Though-loading Icy roads, see External tem‐ system 143 Halogen headlights, bulb re‐ perature warning 81 Fold-out position, wiper 70 placement 194 Identification marks, tires 176 Foot brake 153 Handbrake, refer to parking Identification number, see ve‐ Front airbags 95 brake 67 hicle identification num‐ Front-end collision warning Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ ber 9 with City Braking func‐ nating code 138 iDrive 18 tion 104 Hazard warning flashers 202 Ignition key, refer to Remote Front fog lights 93 Head airbags 95 control 34 Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐ Headlight control, auto‐ Ignition off 63 placement 197 matic 91 Ignition on 63
221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 222
Reference Everything from A to Z
Indication of a flat tire 99, 102 Interval mode 69 Lights 90 Indicator and alarm lamps, Lights and bulbs 193 see Check Control 77 J Light switch 90 Indicator lamp, see Check Load 156 Control 77 Jacking points for the vehicle Loading 155 Individual air distribu‐ jack 200 Lock, door 39 tion 131, 134 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Locking/unlocking via door Individual settings, refer to sion 72 lock 39 Personal Profile 35 Jump-starting 203 Locking/unlocking with re‐ Inflation pressure, tires 172 mote control 37 Inflation pressure warning, K Locking, automatic 43 tires 102 Locking, settings 43 Info display, refer to On- Key/remote control 34 Locking via trunk lid 40 Board computer 85 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Low beams 90 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Access 41 Low beams, automatic, refer tor TPM 99 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ to High-beam Assistant 92 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor sonal Profile 35 Lower back support 50 FTM 102 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ Luggage rack, see Roof- Instrument cluster 76 mission 71 mounted luggage rack 157 Instrument cluster, electronic Knee airbag 96 Lumbar support 50 displays 76 Instrument lighting 93 L M Integrated key 34 Integrated Owner's Manual in Lamp replacement 193 Maintenance 191 the vehicle 30 Lamp replacement, front 194 Maintenance require‐ Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lamp replacement, rear 198 ments 191 quest 202 Lane departure warning 109 Maintenance, service require‐ Intelligent Safety 103 Lane margin, warning 109 ments 82 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Language on Control Dis‐ Maintenance system, gram 133 play 88 BMW 191 Interior equipment 137 Lashing eyes, securing Make-up mirror 141 Interior lights 93 cargo 156 Malfunction displays, see Interior lights during unlock‐ LATCH child restraint sys‐ Check Control 77 ing 37 tem 61 Manual air distribu‐ Interior lights with the vehicle Launch Control 74 tion 131, 134 locked 38 Leather, care 210 Manual air flow 131, 134 Interior motion sensor 45 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Manual mode, Steptronic Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ odes 194 transmission 72 matic dimming feature 57 Letters and numbers, enter‐ Manual operation, door Interior rearview mirror, com‐ ing 25 lock 39 pass 139 Light alloy wheels, care 210 Manual operation, exterior Interior rearview mirror, man‐ Light control 91 mirrors 56 ually dimmable 57 Light-emitting diodes, Manual operation, fuel filler Internet page 6 LEDs 194 flap 168 Interval display, service re‐ Lighter 141 Manual operation, Park Dis‐ quirements 82 Lighting 90 tance Control PDC 121
222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 223
Everything from A to Z Reference
Manual operation, rearview Neck restraints, front, refer to Operating concept, iDrive 18 camera 123 Head restraints 53 Optional equipment, standard Manual transmission 71 Neck restraints, rear, refer to equipment 6 Marking on approved Head restraints 54 Outside air, refer to Auto‐ tires 179 Neutral cleaner, see wheel matic recirculated-air con‐ Marking, run-flat tires 180 cleaner 210 trol 134 Master key, refer to Remote New wheels and tires 178 Overheating of engine, refer control 34 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ to Coolant temperature 80 Maximum cooling 133 towing 206 Maximum speed, display 83 P Maximum speed, winter O tires 179 Paint, vehicle 209 Measure, units of 88 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 192 Parallel parking assistant 125 Medical kit 203 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Park Distance Control Memory, seat, mirror 55 agnosis 192 PDC 120 Menu, EfficientDynamics 162 Obstacle marking, rearview Parked-car ventilation 136 Menu in instrument clus‐ camera 124 Parked vehicle, condensa‐ ter 84 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐ tion 154 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 ommended fuel grade 170 Parking aid, refer to PDC 120 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ Odometer 80 Parking assistant 125 ing concept 20 Office, see user's manual for Parking brake 67 Messages, see Check Con‐ Navigation, Entertainment Parking lights 90 trol 77 and Communication Parking lights, bulb replace‐ Microfilter 132, 135 Oil 187 ment 196 Minimum tread, tires 178 Oil, adding 188 Parts and accessories 7 Mirror 55 Oil additives 188 Passenger side mirror, tilting Mirror memory 55 Oil change 189 downward 56 Mobile communication devi‐ Oil change interval, service Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ ces in the vehicle 153 requirements 82 era 124 Mobility System 180 Oil filler neck 188 PDC Park Distance Con‐ Modifications, technical, refer Oil types, alternative 189 trol 120 to Safety 7 Oil types, approved 189 Pedestrian warning with city Moisture in headlight 194 Old batteries, disposal 200 braking function 107 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ On-board computer 85 Personal Profile 35 play 18 On-board computer, refer to Personal Profile, exporting Mounting of child restraint On-board computer 85 profiles 36 systems 59 Onboard monitor, refer to Personal Profile, importing Multifunction steering wheel, Control Display 18 profiles 37 buttons 14 Onboard vehicle tool kit 193 Pinch protection system, Opening/closing via door glass sunroof 47 N lock 39 Pinch protection system, win‐ Opening and closing 34 dows 46 Navigation, see user's manual Opening and closing, without Plastic, care 210 for Navigation, Entertain‐ remote control 39 Power failure 200 ment and Communication Opening and closing, with re‐ Power sunroof, glass 46 mote control 37 Power windows 45
223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 224
Reference Everything from A to Z
Pressure, tire air pres‐ Replacing wheels/tires 178 Seat and mirror memory 55 sure 172 Reporting safety defects 9 Seat belts, refer to Safety Pressure warning, tires 102 RES button, see Cruise con‐ belts 52 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ trol 118 Seat heating, front 51 file 35 Reserve warning, refer to Seating position for chil‐ Programmable memory but‐ Range 81 dren 59 tons, iDrive 24 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Seats 48 Protective function, glass TPM 99 Selection list in instrument sunroof 47 Retaining straps, securing cluster 84 Protective function, win‐ cargo 156 Selector lever, Steptronic dows 46 Retreaded tires 179 transmission 72 Push-and-turn switch, refer to Roadside parking lights 91 Sensors, care 211 Controller 18, 19 RON recommended fuel Service and warranty 8 grade 170 Service requirements, Condi‐ R Roofliner 17 tion Based Service Roof load capacity 214 CBS 191 Radiator fluid 190 Roof-mounted luggage Service requirements, dis‐ Radio-operated key, refer to rack 157 play 82 Remote control 34 Rope for tow-starting/ Services, ConnectedDrive Radio ready state 63 towing 206 Servotronic 114 Radio, see user's manual for RSC Run Flat System Com‐ SET button, see Cruise con‐ Navigation, Entertainment ponent, refer to Run-flat trol 118 and Communication tires 180 Settings, locking/unlock‐ Rain sensor 69 Rubber components, ing 43 Rear lights 198 care 210 Settings on Control Dis‐ Rear socket 142 Run-flat tires 180 play 87 Rearview camera 123 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Rearview mirror 55 S ror 55 Rear window de‐ Shift paddles on the steering froster 131, 134 Safe braking 153 wheel 73 Recirculated-air filter 135 Safety 7 Side airbags 95 Recirculated-air Safety belt reminder for driv‐ Signaling, horn 14 mode 131, 134 er's seat and front passen‐ Signals when unlocking 43 Recommended fuel ger seat 53 Sitting safely 48 grade 170 Safety belts 52 Size 214 Recommended tire Safety belts, care 211 Slide/tilt glass roof 46 brands 179 Safety systems, airbags 95 Snow chains 183 Refueling 168 Saving fuel 158 Socket 141 Remaining range 81 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Remote control/key 34 play 18 nostics 192 Remote control, malfunc‐ Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐ SOS button 202 tion 38 hicle tool kit 193 Spare fuse 201 Remote control, univer‐ Screw thread, see screw Specified engine oil sal 137 thread for tow fitting, screw types 189 Replacement fuse 201 thread for tow fitting 207 Speed, average 86 Replacing parts 193 Sealant 180
224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 225
Everything from A to Z Reference
Speed limit detection, on- Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ Tone, see user's manual for board computer 86 ing 114 Navigation, Entertainment Speed limiter, display 83 Switch-on times, parked-car and Communication Speed Limit Information 83 ventilation 136 Tool 193 Speed warning 87 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Total vehicle weight 214 Split screen 23 Symbols 6 Touchpad 21 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Symbols in the status field 23 Tow fitting 206 Driving Control 115 Towing 205 Sport displays, torque dis‐ T Tow lug, see Tow fitting 206 play, performance dis‐ Tow-starting 205 play 87 Tachometer 80 Tow truck 205 SPORT program, Dynamic Tail lights 198 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ Driving Control 115 Technical changes, refer to tor 98 Sport program, transmis‐ Safety 7 Traction control 113 sion 72 Technical data 214 TRACTION, driving dynam‐ Sport steering, variable 114 Telephone, see user's manual ics 113 Stability control systems 112 for Navigation, Entertain‐ Transmission lock, electronic Start/stop, automatic func‐ ment and Communication unlocking 74 tion 65 Temperature, automatic cli‐ Transmission, manual trans‐ Start/Stop button 63 mate control 131, 133 mission 71 Start function during malfunc‐ Temperature display for ex‐ Transmission, Steptronic tion 35 ternal temperature 81 transmission 71 Starting the engine 64 Terminal, starting aid 204 Transporting children Status control display, Text messages, supplemen‐ safely 59 tires 99 tary 79 Tread, tires 177 Status information, iDrive 23 Theft alarm system, refer to Trip computer 86 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Alarm system 44 Triple turn signal activa‐ Steering assistance 114 Thigh support 50 tion 68 Steering wheel, adjusting 57 Through-loading system 143 Trip odometer 80 Steering wheel heating 58 Tilt alarm sensor 44 Truck for tow-starting/ Steptronic Sport transmis‐ Time of arrival 86 towing 205 sion, refer to Steptronic Tire damage 178 Trunk lid closing 40 transmission 71 Tire identification marks 176 Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Steptronic transmission 71 Tire inflation pressure 172 ing 41 Stopping the engine 64 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Storage compartment in the tor, refer to FTM 102 Trunk lid opening 40 rear 147 Tire Pressure Monitor Trunk lid via remote con‐ Storage compartments 145 TPM 98 trol 38 Storage, tires 180 Tires, changing 178 Turning circle lines, rearview Storing the vehicle 211 Tire sealant 180 camera 124 Suitable engine oils 189 Tires, everything on wheels Turn signals, operation 67 Summer tires, tread 177 and tires 172 Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ Sun visor 141 Tires, run-flat tires 180 placement 198 Supplementary text mes‐ Tire tread 177 sages 79
225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15 Seite 226
Reference Everything from A to Z
U Warning displays, see Check Wrench, see Onboard vehicle Control 77 tool kit 193 Unintentional alarm 45 Warning messages, see Units of measure 88 Check Control 77 X Universal remote control 137 Warning triangle 203 Unlock button, Steptronic Warranty 7 xDrive 113 transmission 72 Washer fluid 70 Xenon headlights, bulb re‐ Unlocking/locking via door Washer nozzles, wind‐ placement 196 lock 39 shield 70 Unlocking/locking with re‐ Washer system 68 mote control 37 Washing, vehicle 208 Unlocking, settings 43 Water on roads 153 Updates made after the edito‐ Weights 214 rial deadline 7 Welcome lamps during un‐ Upholstery care 210 locking 37 USB interface 142 Welcome lights 90 Wheel cleaner 210 V Wheels, changing 178 Wheels, everything on wheels Vanity mirror 141 and tires 172 Variable sport steering 114 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor Vehicle battery 200 FTM 102 Vehicle battery, replac‐ Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ ing 200 tor TPM 98 Vehicle, break-in 152 Window defroster, Vehicle care 209 rear 131, 134 Vehicle features and op‐ Windows, powered 45 tions 6 Windshield washer fluid 70 Vehicle identification num‐ Windshield washer noz‐ ber 9 zles 70 Vehicle jack 200 Windshield washer sys‐ Vehicle paint 209 tem 68 Vehicle storage 211 Windshield wiper 68 Vehicle wash 208 Winter storage, care 211 Ventilation 135 Winter tires, suitable Ventilation, refer to Parked- tires 179 car ventilation 136 Winter tires, tread 177 VIN, see vehicle identification Wiper 68 number 9 Wiper blades, replacing 193 Voice activation system 27 Wiper fluid 70 Wiper, fold-out position 70 W Wiper system 68 Wood, care 210 Warning and indicator lamps, Word match concept, naviga‐ see Check Control 77 tion 25
226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15
More about BMW
The Ultimate bmwusa.com Driving Machine® 01 40 2 961 270 ue
*BL296127000T*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 270 - II/15